Tekla Structures System Manual
Product version 15.0 February 2009 © 2009 Tekla Corporation
© 2009 Tekla Corporation and its licensors. All rights reserved. This Software Manual has been developed for use with the referenced Software. Use of the Software, and use of this Software Manual are governed by a License Agreement. Among other provisions, the License Agreement sets certain warranties for the Software and this Manual, disclaims other warranties, limits recoverable damages, defines permitted uses of the Software, and determines whether you are an authorized user of the Software. All information set forth in this manual is provided with the warranty set forth in the License Agreement. Please refer to the License Agreement for important obligations and applicable limitations and restrictions on your rights. Tekla does not guarantee that the text is free of technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Tekla reserves the right to make changes and additions to this manual due to changes in the software or otherwise. In addition, this Software Manual is protected by copyright law and by international treaties. Unauthorized reproduction, display, modification, or distribution of this Manual, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the full extent permitted by law. Tekla, Tekla Structures, Xcity, Xengineer, Xpipe, Xroad, Xpower, Xsteel, and Xstreet are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Tekla Corporation in the European Union, the United States, and/or other countries. Other product and company names mentioned in this Manual are or may be trademarks of their respective owners. By referring to a third-party product or brand, Tekla does not intend to suggest an affiliation with or endorsement by such third party and disclaims any such affiliation or endorsement, except where otherwise expressly stated. Portions of this software: D-Cubed 2D DCM © 2008 Siemens Product Lifecycle Management Software III (GB) Ltd. All rights reserved. EPM toolkit © 1995-2004 EPM Technology a.s., Oslo, Norway. All rights reserved. XML parser © 1999 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved. Project Data Control Library © 2006 - 2007 DlhSoft. All rights reserved. DWGdirect, DGNdirect and OpenDWG Toolkit/Viewkit libraries © 1998-2005 Open Design Alliance. All rights reserved. FLEXnet Copyright © 2006 Acresso Software Inc. All Rights Reserved. This product contains proprietary and confidential technology provided by and owned by Acresso Software Inc. Of Chicago, Illinois, USA. Any use, copying, publication, distribution, display, modification, or transmission of such technology in whole or in part in any form or by any means without the prior express written permission of Acresso Software Inc. is strictly prohibited. Except where expressly provided by Acresso Software Inc. in writing, possession of this technology shall not be construed to confer any license or rights under any of Acresso Software´s intellectual property rights, whether by estoppel, implication, or otherwise. The software is protected by U.S. Patent 7,302,368. Also elements of the software described in this Manual may be the subject of pending patent applications in the European Union and/or other countries including U.S. patent applications 2004031231, 2004267695, 2005285881, 2006000484 and 200613639.
Contents Preface .............................................................................................................13 Audience ........................................................................................................................................................... 13 Additional help resources .................................................................................................................................. 13 Conventions used in this guide ......................................................................................................................... 14 Related guides .................................................................................................................................................. 15
1
Using Tekla Structures effectively......................................................... 17 1.1
General ................................................................................................................................................. 17 Firm and project folders ................................................................................................................... Numbering series ............................................................................................................................. Phases ............................................................................................................................................. Catalogs ........................................................................................................................................... Options............................................................................................................................................. Profile names ............................................................................................................................ Connections .............................................................................................................................. Edge distance ............................................................................................................................ Recording and running macros ........................................................................................................ Warning messages ..........................................................................................................................
1.2
Modeling ............................................................................................................................................... 21 Automating the detailing process ..................................................................................................... Predefining part properties............................................................................................................... Modeling tools.................................................................................................................................. AutoDefaults..................................................................................................................................... AutoConnection................................................................................................................................
1.3
21 22 22 23 23
Drawings and printers........................................................................................................................... 23 Drawing properties ........................................................................................................................... Layouts and templates ..................................................................................................................... Reports and symbols ....................................................................................................................... Selection filters................................................................................................................................. Wizards ............................................................................................................................................ Defining print devices.......................................................................................................................
1.4
18 18 18 18 19 19 19 19 20 21
24 24 24 24 24 24
Autosave............................................................................................................................................... 25 Setting Autosave interval ................................................................................................................. 25 Autosave file location ....................................................................................................................... 26
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
3
Keeping Autosave files..................................................................................................................... Usernames ....................................................................................................................................... Application error ............................................................................................................................... Fatal: Model memory corrupted by read. ................................................................................... 1.5
Customizing the interface...................................................................................................................... 27 Toolbars ........................................................................................................................................... Managing toolbars ..................................................................................................................... Icons .......................................................................................................................................... Creating a user-defined toolbar........................................................................................................ Creating a user-defined menu.......................................................................................................... Defining shortcuts.............................................................................................................................
1.6
2
27 28 29 29 29 30
Optimizing system performance............................................................................................................ 31 Virtual memory ................................................................................................................................. Display adaptor ................................................................................................................................ Solid buffer size................................................................................................................................ How Tekla Structures handles solids ...............................................................................................
1.7
26 26 27 27
31 31 31 32
Customizing Tekla Structures with Tekla Open API ............................................................................. 32
Multi-user mode....................................................................................... 35 2.1
General information on the multi-user mode......................................................................................... 35 When to use multi-user mode .......................................................................................................... Switching between single-user and multi-user modes ............................................................... Changing the server of a multi-user model ................................................................................ Overview of the multi-user system ................................................................................................... The Tekla Structures server ..................................................................................................... How multi-user works ....................................................................................................................... Locking ...................................................................................................................................... Setting up the multi-user system ...................................................................................................... Saving in multi-user mode................................................................................................................ Save ........................................................................................................................................... Autosave .................................................................................................................................... Saving model revision comments..................................................................................................... Shutting down the model.................................................................................................................. Copying multi-user models............................................................................................................... Displaying active multi-users............................................................................................................ Clearing locks................................................................................................................................... Error messages ................................................................................................................................ Recommendations ...........................................................................................................................
2.2
36 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 40 40 40 41 42 42 42 43 43 44
Modeling in multi-user mode ................................................................................................................. 45 Working with a master model ........................................................................................................... 45 Numbering setup .............................................................................................................................. 48
4
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Numbering – specific cases ............................................................................................................. 50 2.3
Drawings in multi-user mode ................................................................................................................ 50 About drawing files........................................................................................................................... 50 Guidelines for multi-user drawings................................................................................................... 51 Locks for drawings ........................................................................................................................... 51
2.4
Maintenance procedures ...................................................................................................................... 51 Checking multi-user databases........................................................................................................ 52 Deleting unnecessary drawing files.................................................................................................. 52
2.5
Access rights ........................................................................................................................................ 52 Locking objects ................................................................................................................................ Controlling access to attributes ........................................................................................................ Restricting access to model ............................................................................................................. Controlling access to numbering setup ............................................................................................
3
53 53 54 55
Files and Folders ..................................................................................... 57 3.1
Initialization files.................................................................................................................................... 57 About variables ................................................................................................................................ Setting variables ........................................................................................................................ Using the Advanced Options dialog box ................................................................................... Editing the user.ini file ............................................................................................................... Disabling variables in an initialization file .................................................................................. Structure........................................................................................................................................... Initialization file reading order .................................................................................................... Creating customized initialization files ....................................................................................... Including other initialization files ................................................................................................ Creating shortcuts ............................................................................................................................
3.2
58 58 58 59 60 60 62 62 62 62
File types and function.......................................................................................................................... 64 Input files.......................................................................................................................................... Component description files ...................................................................................................... Data files .......................................................................................................................................... Data files and modeling tools .................................................................................................... DSTV connection properties ............................................................................................................ Messages......................................................................................................................................... Profiles ............................................................................................................................................. inp (ASCII) ................................................................................................................................. cnv (ASCII) ................................................................................................................................ lis (ASCII) .................................................................................................................................. Binary files ................................................................................................................................. Bin .................................................................................................................................................... Fonts ................................................................................................................................................ Symbols ...........................................................................................................................................
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
64 64 65 66 68 68 69 69 69 69 69 70 70 70
5
System ............................................................................................................................................. rpt ............................................................................................................................................... tpl ............................................................................................................................................... lay .............................................................................................................................................. plotdev.bin ................................................................................................................................. Wizard files (dproc) .................................................................................................................... 3.3
Folders .................................................................................................................................................. 71 Folder structure ................................................................................................................................ Folder search order .......................................................................................................................... Model folder...................................................................................................................................... Saved attributes ......................................................................................................................... System folder ................................................................................................................................... Project and firm folders .................................................................................................................... Project folder .............................................................................................................................. Firm folder .................................................................................................................................. Template folder ................................................................................................................................
3.4
77 78 79 80 80 81 81 83 83 84 85 85 85 86 87 88 89 89 89
Log files................................................................................................................................................. 89 Tekla Structures log files .................................................................................................................. Numbering history log ...................................................................................................................... Interpreting numbering.history ................................................................................................... Overlapping part/assembly series ............................................................................................. Drawing history log...........................................................................................................................
6
72 73 74 74 75 75 76 76 76
Customizing Tekla Structures ............................................................................................................... 77 Adding properties ............................................................................................................................. Changing user-defined fields ..................................................................................................... User-defined fields in templates ................................................................................................ Effect on numbering ................................................................................................................... Interpreting objects.inp ..................................................................................................................... Fields in objects.inp ................................................................................................................... Customizing message files............................................................................................................... Customizing parametric profiles ....................................................................................................... Interpreting profitab.inp .............................................................................................................. Save defaults.................................................................................................................................... Creating standard files ............................................................................................................... Customizing other files .............................................................................................................. Creating AutoDrawings wizard files.................................................................................................. Unfolding parameters ....................................................................................................................... Using flat bars .................................................................................................................................. Defining flat bar sizes with fltprops.inp ...................................................................................... Using market sizes ........................................................................................................................... Defining market sizes with marketsize.dat ................................................................................. Example .....................................................................................................................................
3.5
71 71 71 71 71 71
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
90 91 91 92 92
AutoDrawings Wizard log................................................................................................................. Viewing log files ............................................................................................................................... Direct access to parts from log files ................................................................................................. Access part pop-up menu .........................................................................................................
4
93 93 93 94
Catalogs ................................................................................................... 95 4.1
Things you should know ....................................................................................................................... 95 Open a model first............................................................................................................................ The filter ........................................................................................................................................... Saving a modified catalog ................................................................................................................ What is the difference between Update and OK? ............................................................................
4.2
96 96 96 97
The profile catalog ................................................................................................................................ 97 Working with rules............................................................................................................................ 98 Defining the material of profiles ................................................................................................. 99 Adding a rule ........................................................................................................................... 101 Adding a next level rule ........................................................................................................... 101 Editing a rule ........................................................................................................................... 101 Organizing rules ...................................................................................................................... 101 Deleting a rule ......................................................................................................................... 101 Viewing or modifying the profile catalog......................................................................................... 102 Using standardized values for profile dimensions.......................................................................... 102 Adding a profile .............................................................................................................................. 103 Copy an existing profile ........................................................................................................... 103 Creating a new standard profile .............................................................................................. 103 Creating a cross section................................................................................................................. 103 Cross section with no inner contours ....................................................................................... 104 Cross section with inner contours ............................................................................................ 104 Modifying a cross section............................................................................................................... 105 Different types of chamfer ....................................................................................................... 105 Deleting a cross section ................................................................................................................. 105 Adding a standard (fixed) user-defined profile ............................................................................... 106 Adding user-defined attributes to a profile ..................................................................................... 107 Merging profile catalogs ................................................................................................................. 108 Exporting the profile catalog........................................................................................................... 109 Exporting elements from the profile catalog................................................................................... 109 Importing from previous versions ................................................................................................... 109 Importing the profile catalog........................................................................................................... 110 What happens to existing profiles? ......................................................................................... 110 User-defined fixed cross section definitions ............................................................................ 110 User-defined attributes ............................................................................................................ 111
4.3
The material catalog ........................................................................................................................... 111 Viewing or modifying the material catalog...................................................................................... 111
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
7
Adding a user-defined attribute to a material grade ....................................................................... Units of measure ...................................................................................................................... Adding a material type.................................................................................................................... Adding a new material grade.......................................................................................................... Deleting a material grade ............................................................................................................... Defining your own symbols for materials........................................................................................ Export and import ........................................................................................................................... 4.4
The bolt and bolt assembly catalogs................................................................................................... 115 Viewing or modifying the bolt catalog............................................................................................. Saving a modified bolt catalog ....................................................................................................... Viewing or modifying bolt assemblies ............................................................................................ Creating studs ................................................................................................................................ Merging bolt catalogs ..................................................................................................................... Exporting the bolt catalog............................................................................................................... Importing the bolt catalog ............................................................................................................... Upgrading to a new version .....................................................................................................
The reinforcing bar catalog ................................................................................................................. 122
4.6
For the advanced user ........................................................................................................................ 123 123 124 124 125 126 130
AutoConnection .................................................................................... 133 5.1
AutoConnection setup......................................................................................................................... 133 AutoConnection setup .................................................................................................................... AutoConnection rule groups........................................................................................................... AutoConnection rule sets ............................................................................................................... Rules.zxt ........................................................................................................................................ Changing a connection...................................................................................................................
5.2
5.3
134 135 135 137 137
AutoDefaults setup.............................................................................................................................. 137 AutoDefaults setup ......................................................................................................................... Connection properties files............................................................................................................. Saving connection properties .................................................................................................. Access to properties files ......................................................................................................... Defaults.zxt..................................................................................................................................... Priority of rule sets.......................................................................................................................... Editing connection properties .........................................................................................................
8
115 117 117 119 121 121 121 121
4.5
A closer look at the export file ........................................................................................................ Do’s & don’ts of editing the export file ............................................................................................ Importing part of the bolt catalog.................................................................................................... Units used in export and import...................................................................................................... Bolt length calculation .................................................................................................................... Polybeam length calculation...........................................................................................................
5
112 112 113 113 113 113 114
138 139 139 139 140 140 140
AutoConnection and AutoDefaults rules ............................................................................................. 141
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Combining and iterating properties ................................................................................................ Limitations ............................................................................................................................... Combining properties ..................................................................................................................... Iteration with connection check ...................................................................................................... Reaction forces and UDL ...............................................................................................................
6
143 144 144 145 147
CNC......................................................................................................... 149 6.1
NC files ............................................................................................................................................... 149 Setting up NC files ......................................................................................................................... Defining destination machines for parts ......................................................................................... Defining selection criteria ............................................................................................................... Maximum size ......................................................................................................................... Profile type .............................................................................................................................. Maximum size of holes ............................................................................................................ Defining hole properties ................................................................................................................. Creating NC files ............................................................................................................................ Creating tube NC files .................................................................................................................... Defining the output format and folder.............................................................................................
6.2
150 151 152 153 153 154 155 157 158 159
DSTV .................................................................................................................................................. 159 Fittings affect NC data.................................................................................................................... 160
6.3
DXF..................................................................................................................................................... 161 Converting DSTV files to DXF ....................................................................................................... 161
6.4
Pop-marks ......................................................................................................................................... 162 Creating pop-marks........................................................................................................................ 162 Pop-mark settings .......................................................................................................................... 163 Pop-marking options ............................................................................................................... 164
6.5
Hard stamps ....................................................................................................................................... 165 Creating hard stamps..................................................................................................................... Hard stamp properties.................................................................................................................... Information contained in hard stamps ..................................................................................... Position of hard stamps ........................................................................................................... Hard stamps for secondary parts ............................................................................................
7
165 165 166 166 166
Import and export .................................................................................. 167 7.1
Import and export basics .................................................................................................................... 167 Using import and export ................................................................................................................. Available formats............................................................................................................................ Importing into Tekla Structures ............................................................................................... Exporting from Tekla Structures ..............................................................................................
7.2
168 168 168 170
Conversion files .................................................................................................................................. 172
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
9
Converting twin profiles .................................................................................................................. Creating conversion files ................................................................................................................ Locating conversion files ................................................................................................................ Sample conversion files ................................................................................................................. Troubleshooting.............................................................................................................................. 7.3
Importing models................................................................................................................................. 175 Import tools..................................................................................................................................... Overview of importing models ........................................................................................................ Finishing the import ................................................................................................................. Re-importing a model ..................................................................................................................... Revision control options ........................................................................................................... Creating reports of import............................................................................................................... Importing DWG/DXF files ............................................................................................................... CIS import ...................................................................................................................................... CAD import..................................................................................................................................... CAD specific information ......................................................................................................... Creating log files ...................................................................................................................... CAD import file types...................................................................................................................... SDNF specific options ............................................................................................................. FEM import..................................................................................................................................... FEM specific information ......................................................................................................... FEM import file types ............................................................................................................... DSTV files ...................................................................................................................................... About DSTV ............................................................................................................................. STAAD files .................................................................................................................................... Stan 3d files.................................................................................................................................... Bus import ...................................................................................................................................... Yield stress in FEM import ............................................................................................................. Model dump import......................................................................................................................... ASCII import ................................................................................................................................... ASCII format description ................................................................................................................ Attribute import ............................................................................................................................... About input files ....................................................................................................................... Example input file for drawings ................................................................................................ Example input file for parts ...................................................................................................... Data types file .......................................................................................................................... Steelfab import ............................................................................................................................... Steelfab specific information .................................................................................................... Fabtrol XML import......................................................................................................................... S-Frame import .............................................................................................................................. About S-Frame imports ............................................................................................................ MicasPlus import ............................................................................................................................ MicasPlus specific information .................................................................................................
10
172 173 173 173 174
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
175 175 176 177 178 179 179 179 180 181 181 181 181 182 182 183 183 184 184 185 186 186 186 187 187 191 192 193 194 194 195 195 196 196 196 196 196
Eureka LPM import ........................................................................................................................ 196 Overview of ELiPLAN import and export........................................................................................ 196 Import ELiPLAN status data .................................................................................................... 197 7.4
Exporting files ..................................................................................................................................... 199 Exporting 3D DWG/DXF ............................................................................................................... Export as ................................................................................................................................. Exporting 3D DGN ......................................................................................................................... Exporting FEM ............................................................................................................................... Combine segments (MicroSAS) .............................................................................................. STAAD .................................................................................................................................... DSTV ....................................................................................................................................... Exporting CIMsteel......................................................................................................................... Analysis model ........................................................................................................................ Manufacturing model ............................................................................................................... More CIMsteel information ...................................................................................................... Exporting CAD ............................................................................................................................... PML ......................................................................................................................................... SDNF ....................................................................................................................................... XML ......................................................................................................................................... PDMS ...................................................................................................................................... Exporting MIS................................................................................................................................. MIS types ................................................................................................................................ MIS list file ............................................................................................................................... Exporting ASCII.............................................................................................................................. Exporting IFC ................................................................................................................................. Defining the resulting IFC entity for the exported model objects ............................................. Exporting a Tekla Structures model into an IFC file ................................................................ Exporting user-defined and template attributes as property sets into IFC models .................. Exporting a model dump ................................................................................................................ Exporting BVBS ............................................................................................................................. Exporting reinforcement to BVBS format ................................................................................. Export rebar BVBS (78) dialog box ......................................................................................... BVBS (78) specification ........................................................................................................... Exporting Unitechnik ...................................................................................................................... Exporting cast units to Unitechnik format ................................................................................ Unitechnik export reference .................................................................................................... Main ......................................................................................................................................... Unitechnik configuration .......................................................................................................... TS configuration ...................................................................................................................... Reinforcement ......................................................................................................................... Data specification .................................................................................................................... Overview of ELiPLAN import and export........................................................................................ Exporting ELiPLAN .................................................................................................................. TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
199 200 201 202 202 202 203 204 204 205 206 208 209 210 211 212 212 213 214 214 214 214 216 217 217 218 220 220 222 223 224 227 228 233 237 239 243 243 244 11
7.5
Exporting drawings.............................................................................................................................. 246 Layers............................................................................................................................................. 246 Advanced line type and layer conversion ................................................................................ 248
7.6
Tekla WebViewer................................................................................................................................ 251 Publishing a model as a web page................................................................................................. Customizing Web Viewer tooltips................................................................................................... Web templates ............................................................................................................................... Emailing WebViewer models.......................................................................................................... Receiving WebViewer models........................................................................................................ Sending WebViewer links............................................................................................................... Handling named views ................................................................................................................... Handling clip planes ....................................................................................................................... Hiding and showing objects............................................................................................................ Full content rendering..................................................................................................................... How to move and zoom?................................................................................................................
8 9
12
251 253 254 254 254 254 255 255 257 257 257
File extensions ...................................................................................... 259 Reserved shortcuts............................................................................... 263 9.1
Common shortcuts.............................................................................................................................. 263
9.2
Modeling commands........................................................................................................................... 264
9.3
Drawing commands ............................................................................................................................ 265
9.4
UCS..................................................................................................................................................... 266
9.5
Representation for parts...................................................................................................................... 266
9.6
Representation for component parts................................................................................................... 266
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
Preface
Tekla Structures includes complete documentation in an accessible help system. Our online help is a detailed guide to Tekla Structures concepts, tools, commands, and features, with plenty of examples. The documentation is also available in PDF format. Topics in the Preface are:
• • • •
Audience (p. 13) Additional help resources (p. 13) Conventions used in this guide (p. 14) Related guides (p. 15)
Audience This guide is aimed at structural engineers, detailers and designers who model, analyze, and design concrete and steel structures. We assume that you are familiar with the processes of structural engineering.
Additional help resources The following resources also provide information about Tekla Structures: Web site
http://www.tekla.com
E-mail
Contact your local helpdesk via e-mail:
Area office
E-mail address
China
[email protected]
Finland
[email protected]
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
13
Area office
E-mail address
France
[email protected]
Germany
[email protected]
India
[email protected]
Japan
[email protected]
Malaysia
[email protected]
Middle East
[email protected]
Sweden
[email protected]
UK
[email protected]
US
[email protected]
If you believe you have discovered a problem with this software, please report it to your Tekla Structures Reseller using the maintenance request form provided at Help > Tekla on the Web > Maintenance request.... Please send any comments or suggestions about Tekla Structures documentation to
[email protected]. Tekla Extranet
Anyone with a current maintenance contract can use Tekla Extranet. Register now to get free access to our online discussion forums, hints & tips, software downloads, tutorials, and more. To register, go to https://extranet.tekla.com. You can also access Tekla Extranet from Tekla Structures by clicking Help > Online Support > Tekla Extranet.
Conventions used in this guide Typefaces
We use different typefaces for different items in this guide. In most cases the meaning is obvious from the context. If you are not sure what a certain typeface represents, you can check it here.
Convention
Usage
Bold
Bold indicates the names of keyboard keys. Bold is also used for general emphasis in text.
Arial bold
Any text that you see in the user interface appears in Arial bold. Items such as window and dialog box titles, field and button names, combo box options, and list box items are displayed in this typeface.
Italic bold
New terms are in italic bold when they appear in the current context for the first time.
Monospace
Extracts of Tekla Structures’s program code, HTML, or other material that you would normally edit in a text editor, appears in monospaced font. Filenames and folder paths appear in monospace. Also all the text you enter yourself appears in monospaced font.
Noteboxes
14
We use several types of noteboxes, marked by different icons. Their functions are shown below:
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
A tip might introduce a shortcut, or suggest alternative ways of doing things. A tip never contains information that is absolutely necessary.
A note draws attention to details that you might easily overlook. It can also point you to other information in this guide that you might find useful.
You should always read very important notes and warnings, like this one. They will help you avoid making serious mistakes, or wasting your time.
This symbol indicates advanced or highly technical information that is usually of interest only to advanced or technically-oriented readers. You are never required to understand this kind of information.
Related guides Tekla Structures includes a comprehensive help system in a series of online books. You will also receive a printed installation guide with your Tekla Structures installation DVD.
•
Modeling Manual How to create a physical model.
•
Analysis Manual How to create loads and run structural analysis.
•
Detailing Manual How to create reinforcement, connections, and details.
•
Drawing Manual How to create and edit drawings.
•
System Manual Covers advanced features and how to maintain the Tekla Structures environment.
•
Task Manager User Guide How to create, store, and manage scheduled tasks, and link the tasks to their corresponding model objects. This guide is available in English on the Tekla Extranet.
•
TplEd User’s Guide
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
15
How to create and edit report and drawing templates.
•
SymEd User’s Guide How to use the SymEd graphical interface to manipulate symbols.
•
Installation Troubleshooting Guide Printed booklet explaining how to install Tekla Structures.
16
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
1
Using Tekla Structures effectively
Introduction
With Tekla Structures you do not have to do everything manually. There are many features you can you use to automate your work processes. You will find it useful to read this chapter before starting a project in Tekla Structures.
In this chapter
This chapter is a collection of practical suggestions from experienced Tekla Structures users and service personnel on how to use Tekla Structures effectively. You will also find many links to more detailed explanations of the various features discussed here and step-by-step instructions where appropriate.
Contents
This chapter is divided into the following sections:
• • • • • •
General (p. 17) Modeling (p. 21) Drawings and printers (p. 23) Autosave (p. 25) Customizing the interface (p. 27) Optimizing system performance (p. 31)
1.1 General This section describes how to make the most of various Tekla Structures features when setting up a project. Topics
Firm and project folders (p. 18) Numbering series (p. 18) Phases (p. 18) Catalogs (p. 18) Options (p. 19) Recording and running macros (p. 20)
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Using Tekla Structures effectively
17
Firm and project folders Before you customize any object properties for specific projects or organizations, create firm and project folders in which to store them. This will save you time setting up future projects and also when you upgrade Tekla Structures. Project and firm folders (p. 75)
See also
Folder search order (p. 73) Predefining part properties (p. 22)
Numbering series Numbering series
Before you start modeling, it is good idea to plan the numbering prefixes and start numbers you will use for the entire project. Careful planning prevents numbering conflicts.
Example
You could define the prefixes and start numbers for a multi-storey building as follows:
Profiles
Plates
Column assembly
Beam assembly
Brace assembly
Truss assembly
1st floor
PR1000
1000
C1000
B1000
V1000
T1000
2nd floor
PR2000
2000
C2000
B2000
V2000
T2000
See also
Numbering the Model Options (p. 19)
Phases You can use phases to break up a model into different sections. Phases are often used to indicate erection sequences. You can create reports and views, hide objects and copy objects from other models according to their phase number. Example
You have a large project on which several users will work simultaneously in single-user mode. First create a basic model which includes, for example, the columns. This is phase 1. You then copy this basic model to all users. Each user then works on a separate part of the building. As each part of the model is completed, you can copy it back to the basic model as a separate phase (phase 2, 3, etc).
See also
Phases Copying objects from another model Filtering objects using a view filter
Catalogs Before you start a project, check that the catalogs you are using conform to the project requirements. Ensure all users access the same catalogs. See also
Folder search order (p. 73) Catalogs (p. 95) Open a model first (p. 96) The profile catalog (p. 97)
18
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Using Tekla Structures effectively
The material catalog (p. 111) The bolt and bolt assembly catalogs (p. 115) The reinforcing bar catalog (p. 122)
Options Check that your option settings are set up correctly before you start modeling. Click Tools > Options > Options..., and see the different tabs. Component properties override these settings. Tekla Structures only uses the values set in the Options dialog box if the corresponding fields in the component dialog boxes are empty. Tekla Structures uses the information in the Options dialog box when it creates parts using components. Example
It is important that profile names are set up correctly so that you can use filters and wizards effectively. If you change settings in the Options dialog box, Tekla Structures only applies the new settings to components you subsequently create. Components you created prior to changing the preferences are not affected.
In multi-user mode, all users working in the same model have the same option settings as well as other properties, catalogs, etc.
Profile names In the Preferences tab, profile names are parametric profile prefixes. They must exist in the profile catalog. If you want to use a parametric profile name that does not exist in the catalog, first add it to profile catalog, then enter it here. Tekla Structures uses the Folded plate prefix when you use the Polyplate command in macros. See also The profile catalog (p. 97).
Connections To define the default bolt properties to use in connections, select a Bolt standard and Bolt size. Enter part start numbers in fields Pos1 to Pos4. Cross-check these settings against the numbering series you define to make sure they cannot overlap. If they overlap, Tekla Structures may create two non-identical parts with the same part number. This generates an error in the log file numbering.history.
Edge distance When you use components, Tekla Structures uses the Factor of bolt edge distance and Element considered fields to check that the bolts it creates are not too close to the edge of a part. Tekla Structures warns you if they are. Check that bolt edge distance is set according to the standard you are using. Use the Element considered field to base edge distance checks on bolt or hole diameter. Default edge distance settings depend on the environment. If you change the default settings, use Save defaults (p. 84) command to save settings in the current model folder. See also Getting Started.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Using Tekla Structures effectively
19
Recording and running macros Tekla Structures enables you to record a series of actions from menus, dialog boxes, and shortcuts. Recording a macro
To record a macro: 1. 2. 3.
Click Tools > Macros... to open the Macros dialog box. Enter a Macro name. Click Record.
4. 5.
Perform the actions you want to record. Click Stop to stop recording.
Macros are saved as *.cs files, in the folder defined with the XS_MACRO_DIRECTORY variable in the environment-specific initialization files.
The recorded macro is saved in the drawings or modeling folders, depending on in which mode the macro was recorded in. Creating a macro manually
To manually create a macro file, click Create in the Macros dialog box. This creates an empty macro file, which you can manually edit, or copy and paste commands to it from other macro files.
Running a macro
To run a macro: 1. 2.
20
Click Tools > Macros... to open the Macros dialog box. Select the macro and click Run.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Using Tekla Structures effectively
Editing macros
To view or edit a macro: 1. 2. 3. 4.
First check that the file type .cs is associated with suitable text editor. Click Tools > Macros... to open the Macros dialog box. Select the macro and click Edit. The macro opens in the associated text editor.
Macros are based on C# commands and in case you want to edit macros, knowledge of C# programming is needed.
Timestamp
If you want to examine the time spent on different tasks while recording macros, use the variable XS_MACRO_ENABLE_TIMESTAMP.
Warning messages Some third party applications may cause unexpected complications, such as unnecessary warning messages, when working with Tekla Structures. Applications that are known to cause complications are anti-spyware programs.
1.2 Modeling This section explains how to make the most of the various modeling tools and features in Tekla Structures. Topics
Automating the detailing process (p. 21) Predefining part properties (p. 22) Modeling tools (p. 22) AutoDefaults (p. 23) AutoConnection (p. 23)
Automating the detailing process If you have a standard way of configuring connections, save time by saving the connection properties once. Store them in firm or project folders for future use. See Firm and project folders (p. 18). Tekla Structures includes AutoConnection and AutoDefaults tools to automate the modeling process. So you can customize Tekla Structures to suit a particular project and the way you work. See AutoConnectionandAutoDefaults and also AutoConnection (p. 133). There are three levels of automation that you can help you work faster and more accurately.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Using Tekla Structures effectively
21
Predefining part properties If you have additional information you need to include for particular parts, create user-defined attributes. Tekla Structures saves all customized object properties in the current model folder. You can also copy the attribute files to project or firm folders for future use. See Firm and project folders (p. 18) and Parts.
In multi-user mode, all users working on the same model use the same preferences and attribute files.
Example
For beam properties, this technique guarantees that part names are correct. This means you can easily use a wizard to create drawings. See Using AutoDrawings to create drawings and Creating AutoDrawings wizard files (p. 85). Consider developing a naming policy for files containing customized object properties. Then you can easily cut and paste them to firm and project folders. This also makes it easier to manage objects in view filters, selection filters, drawing properties, etc.
Using predefined properties
You can set the properties for macros, connections, and other objects (columns, beams, bolts, etc.) then save them. It is then simple to reload these properties either for current or future projects.
Modeling tools Customize the properties of modeling tools you use to create objects, rather than changing the properties manually each time. Example
You know you will use the same type of stairs in several projects. Set up and save the stair modeling tool properties once. When you next need to use that particular stair modeling tool you can just load the pre-defined properties, as shown below. When you apply the modeling tool, Tekla Structures creates exactly the same stairs.
22
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Using Tekla Structures effectively
Predefined properties See also Getting Started.
AutoDefaults Use AutoDefaults to automatically apply the correct properties to existing connections. Using this technique you are also building your own expertise into the Tekla Structures database, so the entire company benefits from it. See AutoConnection and AutoDefaults, and also AutoConnection (p. 133).
AutoConnection Use the AutoConnection feature to automatically apply connections. You can use AutoConnection to quickly add connections individually, in phases, or projectwide. This is a useful technique when you are working on a large project using many connections, modifying a model, or importing modified profiles. See AutoConnection and AutoDefaults, and also AutoConnection (p. 133).
1.3 Drawings and printers This section explains how to make the most of the selection filters, wizards and printer catalog settings to standardize drawing creation and printing. Topics
Drawing properties (p. 24) Layouts and templates (p. 24) Reports and symbols (p. 24) Selection filters (p. 24) Wizards (p. 24) Defining print devices (p. 24)
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Using Tekla Structures effectively
23
Drawing properties Using well-prepared drawing settings and wizards can dramatically reduce the time it takes to create and edit drawings. Define the settings for different types of parts and assemblies carefully. Then the drawings you create are as complete as possible, with little or no need for editing. Examples
Define different assembly drawing settings for columns, beams, secondary beams, plates, bracings and trusses. Define single-part drawing settings for I and H profiles, tubes, round tubes (wrap-around) and plates. Predefine drawing view properties to use additional views in drawings, such as detail, section or plan views. See also Drawing Properties .
Layouts and templates Plan and define the layouts and templates for drawings you will use before you start a project. See Drawing Layout.
Reports and symbols Plan and define special reports and symbols you need for a project.
Selection filters Create your own selection filters to use both when modeling and using wizards to automate drawing creation. You will find it useful to create selection filters for each part with a different name (column, beam, sec.beam, plate, brace, truss, etc.). Use the Selection Filter dialog box to modify existing filters or create your own. See Creating a selection filter.
Wizards Use wizards to create objects and drawings automatically. See Creating AutoDrawings wizard files (p. 85) and Using AutoDrawings to create drawings.
Defining print devices Set up print devices before starting the project. See The printer catalog.
24
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Using Tekla Structures effectively
1.4 Autosave Tekla Structures includes the Autosave feature that backs up and saves your work automatically at set intervals. In addition, we strongly recommend that you implement and test a corporate backup strategy. When restoring system backups, you should always restore an entire copy of a model rather than parts of it. Autosave files have the extension .db1_
.
In multi-user mode, Autosave is not equivalent to the Save command. Autosave only saves a single user’s version of the model and does not update the master model.
Topics
Setting Autosave interval (p. 25) Autosave file location (p. 26) Keeping Autosave files (p. 26) Usernames (p. 26) Application error (p. 27)
Setting Autosave interval You can define Autosave intervals separately for operations performed in the Drawing Editor or while modeling, and for automatic drawing creation. Click Tools > Options > Options... > General.
The first value defines how often Tekla Structures performs an autosave while working in the Model Editor or the Drawing Editor. This number represents the number of menu commands issued. If the command is recursed, for instance creating many beams without interrupting the Create > Beam command, it counts as one menu command. Likewise, in the Drawing Editor, creating many dimensions with the Create > Horizontal dimension command without interrupting the command counts as only one command. The second value is the number of drawings after which Tekla Structures automatically saves your work.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Using Tekla Structures effectively
25
To have the same autosave values for all models, enter the required values to the file standard.opt, located in the folder ..\TeklaStructures\*version*\environments\*your_ environment*\system. Open the file using a standard text editor, such as Notepad. Search for the following rows: dia_autosave.autos_interval dia_autosave.autos_draw_interval Enter the required autosave value for models in the first row, and for drawings in the second row. For example, to have Tekla Structures save the model after every 20 modeling commands and after creating every 10 drawings, enter dia_autosave.autos_interval 20 dia_autosave.autos_draw_interval 10 After you are done, save and close the file.
Autosave file location To have Tekla Structures store Autosave files in a specific folder, use the variable XS_AUTOSAVE_DIRECTORY. Tekla Structures creates the folder automatically. You will find the Autosave file in the autosave folder, in a subfolder with the same name as the model. If you do not use this variable, Tekla Structures stores Autosave files in the current model folder. Example
You are working in multi-user mode and want Tekla Structures to store Autosave files locally, not in the model folder. Set the variable XS_AUTOSAVE_DIRECTORY=%XS_RUNPATH%\autosave.
In multi-user mode, Autosave only saves a single user’s version of the model and does does not update the master model.
You will notice that in multi-user mode Autosave is much faster than using the Save command. This is because Autosave performs a local save, but the Save command updates the master model.
Keeping Autosave files By default Tekla Structures deletes Autosave files when you save and close a model. To keep Autosave files, even if you exit Tekla Structures without saving the model, set the variable XS_KEEP_AUTOSAVE_FILES_ON_EXIT_WHEN_NOT_SAVING=TRUE.
Usernames Give all users a different username when working in both single- and multi-user mode. Tekla Structures identifies users by username.
26
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Using Tekla Structures effectively
Single-user
In single-user mode, if several users with the same username open a model, Tekla Structures does not display a warning. So you risk conflicts when saving the model.
Multi-user
In multi-user mode, Tekla Structures saves Autosave files in the master model folder by default with the filename .db1_. So, if several people are using the same username, conflicts are inevitable. See also Multi-user mode (p. 35).
Application error When you open a model, Tekla Structures automatically checks if the previous session exited normally. If it did not, Tekla Structures prompts whether you want to continue using the Autosave model or the original model.
Fatal: Model memory corrupted by read. When Tekla Structures displays the warning Fatal: Model memory corrupted by read, it means that hardware problems have damaged the model database. Your hard disk may be damaged. Use autosave or system backup files to restore the model.
1.5 Customizing the interface Once you are familiar with Tekla Structures, you can create your own toolbars, menu and shortcuts containing the commands you use every day. This section explains how to do this. Topics
Toolbars (p. 27) Creating a user-defined toolbar (p. 29) Creating a user-defined menu (p. 29) Defining shortcuts (p. 30)
Toolbars In Tekla Structures, both customized toolbars and user-defined menus belong to the user, not the model or PC. You can create as many toolbars as you need.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Using Tekla Structures effectively
27
Do not change existing toolbars, particularly the connection toolbars. Instead, create new ones. See Creating a user-defined toolbar (p. 29).
Managing toolbars To open the Customize dialog box, click Tools > Customize....
Use the Toolbars tab to reorganize toolbars: move commands from one toolbar to another and even create your own toolbars. The tree on the right contains all available toolbars and displays the commands they include.
28
Action
Description
Add or remove commands
In the Customize dialog box, click on a command to select it, then on the toolbar on which you want the command to appear. Click the right arrow to add commands, the left arrow to remove them.
Delete commands or toolbars
In the Customize dialog box, click a command or toolbar to select it, then click Delete.
Restore original toolbar
Click Reset to restore the original toolbar.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Using Tekla Structures effectively
Action
Description
Display toolbar
Check Visible to display the toolbar in Tekla Structures. Tekla Structures uses the following icons to indicate if a toolbar is visible or not:
Move command in toolbar tree
Use arrow buttons.
Icons Tekla Structures displays the icon for the command you select. By default, the icon is 16x16 pixels. If the icons look too small, check Large icons which are 24x24 pixels. Check Tooltips to see the command name when you hold the pointer over an icon.
Creating a user-defined toolbar To create your own toolbar: 1.
Click Tools > Customize to open the Customize dialog box.
Create also the toolbars for Drawing Editor in the Modeling Editor, otherwise they are not written to the registry.
2. 3. 4. 5.
On the Toolbars tab, click New.... An new toolbar with the name User Toolbar 1 appears in the toolbar tree. You can enter a new name for the toolbar. Click commands on the list on the left, then the right arrow to add them to a toolbar. Use the left arrow to remove commands from a toolbar. Repeat step 3 until you have all the desired commands on the toolbar. Click Close.
See also Toolbars (p. 27) and Creating a user-defined menu (p. 29).
Creating a user-defined menu Each user can create their own menu, which is always named User. You can only create one user menu per user. To create your own menu: 1.
Click Tools > Customize to open the Customize dialog box.
Create also the menu for Drawing Editor in the Modeling Editor, otherwise it is not written to the registry.
2.
Click the Menu tab.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Using Tekla Structures effectively
29
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Click commands on the command list on the left, then the right arrow to add them to the menu. Tekla Structures displays the commands on the menu on the right of the dialog box. Use the left arrow to remove commands from the menu. Use the arrow buttons to move a command up or down the toolbar tree. Use the line button to add a separator line above the selected command. Repeat step 3 until you have added all the desired commands to the menu. Click Close. You must restart Tekla Structures to activate the menu. The menu name is always User.
See also Creating a user-defined toolbar (p. 29).
Defining shortcuts If you frequently use certain commands, assign keyboard shortcuts to them. You will find it faster than using the icons and menus. To assign a shortcut to a command: 1. 2.
3. 4. 5. Valid shortcut keys
Click Tools > Customize to open the Customize dialog box. Click on the command on the list on the left of the dialog box. Use the Filter list box to find commands easily. Click to select subgroups of commands. ALL displays all the commands available in Tekla Structures. You can also type in the command name to search for commands. Use the Shortcut fields to assign a shortcut to the command. You can use a single letter, or combine a letter with the Shift, Alt or Ctrl keys. Copy the command to the User menu to activate the shortcut. See Creating a userdefined menu (p. 29). Click Close to exit the Customize dialog box.
You can use the following keys in shortcuts:
• • • • • • • •
A–Z 0–9 F1–F24 Left, Right Up, Down Backspace, Enter, Esc, Tab Insert, Delete, Home, End, Page Up, Page Down Numpad 0–9 Numpad */+-, (Multiply, Divide, Add, Subtract, Decimal)
To define, for example, + as a shortcut, enter add in the Shortcut field:
Restart Tekla Structures. To execute the command, use the + key on the Numpad. The same procedure applies for Multiply, Divide, Subtract and Decimal. Tekla Structures also includes many predefined shortcuts. See Reserved shortcuts (p. 263).
30
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Using Tekla Structures effectively
1.6 Optimizing system performance There are various settings in Tekla Structures that you can modify to improve system performance, which is particularly useful when you are handling large and complex models. Topics
Virtual memory (p. 31) Display adaptor (p. 31) Solid buffer size (p. 31) How Tekla Structures handles solids (p. 32)
Virtual memory You will probably need to adjust the virtual memory settings in Windows to optimize system performance. The amount of virtual memory you need depends on the size of the model, and the processes you are using. (For example, saving in multi-user mode is more memoryintensive than in single user mode.)
To prevent data loss, always use identical values for the Initial size and Maximum size of virtual memory.
Display adaptor Tekla Structures makes use of OpenGL technology, if your display adaptor supports it. You may need to indicate that your display adaptor does not support OpenGL technology. Indications can be: objects displayed incorrectly, or difficulty selecting objects. 1. 2. 3.
Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options... to open the Advanced options dialog box. In the Model view category, set the variable XS_USE_SOFTWARE_RENDERING to TRUE. Restart Tekla Structures.
Solid buffer size To improve performance in large models, try increasing the solid buffer size using the variable XS_SOLID_BUFFER_SIZE. This results in Tekla Structures keeping more solids in memory, so it does not have to continuously recreate them. This technique uses a little extra memory, but can result in significant increases in speed. In one example, increasing the solid buffer size from 5000 to 20000 decreased the time taken to run the numbering routine by 80%. This variable affects many aspects of modeling, drawings and numbering.
If you increase the solid buffer to a size that exceeds the available memory, Tekla Structures uses the hard drive. This slows down the system significantly. Trial and error is the best way to optimize the solid buffer size. See also How Tekla Structures handles solids (p. 32).
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Using Tekla Structures effectively
31
How Tekla Structures handles solids One of the factors that affect performance is the number of verteces in objects. For instance, tubes, particularly if they are curved, usually contain a large number of verteces, as can large numbers of round cuts. The key to optimizing performance in these circumstances is to manipulate the settings that affect how Tekla Structures handles solids. Techniques you can try include:
•
Try setting the variable XS_ROUND_SEGMENTS=21. This results in fewer segment in round cross sections, up to 50% of the original load.
•
Minimize the number of curved segments in curved beams. A value of 20 or less is usually adequate for the bottom chords. See Bending.
• •
Maximize solid buffer size. See Solid buffer size (p. 31).
•
When you create assembly drawings, minimize the number of dimensions, as searching for dimension points in tubes is time-consuming. Avoid using automatic dimensioning in trusses. See Dimensioning.
•
It is much faster to use fast, or reference line parts and fast hole and bolt representation. When you want an exact view of the parts, either minimize the work area first, or only the objects you want Tekla Structures to draw with exact lines. See Display settings.
Minimize the number of views, when you create assembly drawings. For instance, avoid using automatic section view creation in an assembly drawing with many tubes. When Tekla Structures creates the cuts, the solids are are actually cut in the drawing, which is time-consuming.
1.7 Customizing Tekla Structures with Tekla Open API You can customize Tekla Structures to suit your needs further by using the Tekla Open API. Tekla Open API
Tekla Open API is a specialized Application Programming Interface (API) developed by Tekla that enables you to develop applications and additional functionality on the Tekla modeling platform and integrate it into your own environment. Tekla Open API is implemented using Microsoft .NET technology.
Extended applications
Applications that are developed with Tekla Open API to work in conjunction with Tekla Structures are called extended applications.
Examples
With Tekla Open API you can:
•
Record and run user interface actions. By recording and running user interface actions you can automate routine tasks such as creating daily reports.
•
Create automation tools. You can create automation tools for frequently needed objects. With automation tools you can for example create basic structures or add typical details to drawings.
•
Integrate Tekla Structures to other software. You can utilize the Tekla Open API and .NET in transferring information between Tekla Structures and other software, such as Analysis & Design software.
•
32
Create new functionality.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Using Tekla Structures effectively
With Tekla Open API, you can create tools that add new functionality to Tekla Structures. For more information
Reference manuals for Tekla Open API, available in the folder ..\TeklaStructures\*version*\nt\help\enu:
• • • •
Tekla.Structures.Analysis Tekla.Structures.Drawing Tekla.Structures.Model Tekla.Structures.Plugins
.NET startup package, available for download in the Extranet: https://extranet.tekla.com/ user_nf/default.asp?id=22577&root_id=13607&ala_id=22576&mode=readdoc Tekla Open API Extended Applications Download Page in the Extranet: https:// extranet.tekla.com/user_nf/ default.asp?root_id=13610&ala_id=22555&apu=0&mode=readdoc&r=22555
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Using Tekla Structures effectively
33
34
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Using Tekla Structures effectively
2
Introduction
Multi-user mode
You can work on Tekla Structures models in either single-user or multi-user mode. Multi-user mode allows several users to access the same model at the same time. Several users can work on the same project and be aware of the others’ progress. This eliminates the need for copying and merging models. This chapter describes how to set up a multi-user system and how to work in multi-user mode.
Assumed background
You need some experience using the Tekla Structures Model Editor.
Contents
This chapter is divided into the following sections:
• • • • •
General information on the multi-user mode (p. 35) Modeling in multi-user mode (p. 45) Drawings in multi-user mode (p. 50) Maintenance procedures (p. 51) Access rights (p. 52)
2.1 General information on the multi-user mode This section explains how multi-user mode works, and how to set up and use Tekla Structures in multi-user mode.
Tekla Structures multi-user mode only runs on TCP/IP-based networks.
Topics
When to use multi-user mode (p. 36) Overview of the multi-user system (p. 37) How multi-user works (p. 38) Setting up the multi-user system (p. 39)
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Multi-user mode
35
Saving in multi-user mode (p. 40) Shutting down the model (p. 42) Copying multi-user models (p. 42) Error messages (p. 43) Recommendations (p. 44)
When to use multi-user mode You can use Tekla Structures in either single-user or multi-user mode. In single-user mode, only one user can work on a model at one time. When modeling a large project, multi-user mode allows many users to work on a model simultaneously. Advantages
Other issues to consider
• • • • • •
No duplicate models to control, track or store Using only one model reduces on site errors Erection plans based on a single master model Bolt and material lists generated from a single master model Ability to share the workload of large projects among many users Ability to collect model history (see XS_COLLECT_MODEL_HISTORY)
As with all projects, you need to plan your multi-user project carefully. Some issues to consider are:
• •
Only one user can save to the master model at a time
•
Schedule numbering sessions appropriately (it can take some time to number larger models)
• •
If possible, assign distinct areas of the model to each user.
Use a numbering plan. When working with multi-user models, always use the option Synchronize with master model (save-numbering-save) in theNumbering setup dialog box to prevent saving conflicts.
You should never use a mix of single-user and multi-user setups on one project. Saving a multi-user model in single-user mode deletes changes by other users working on the model, and can also corrupt the model. See Saving in multi-user mode (p. 40) to find out how saving works in multi-user mode.
Switching between single-user and multi-user modes You can easily switch between single-user and multi-user modes by using the different options in the Open dialog box. To open a multi-user model in single-user mode: 1.
In the Open dialog box, select the multi-user model.
2.
Right-click and select Open as single-user model from the pop-up menu.
To open a single-user model in multi-user mode: 1.
In the Open dialog box, select the single-user model.
2.
Right-click and select Open as multi-user model from the pop-up menu.
3.
Tekla Structures asks for the name of the server. In the Open as multi-user model dialog box, enter the server name or select it from the list box, and then click OK.
Changing the server of a multi-user model To change the Tekla Structures server of a multi-user model:
36
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Multi-user mode
1.
In the Open dialog box, select the multi-user model.
2.
Right-click and select Change server from the pop-up menu.
3.
Tekla Structures asks for the name of the new server. In the Change server dialog box, enter the server name or select it from the list box, and then click OK.
If you change the server of a model, but the connection to the new server cannot be established, the old connection is restored.
The file .This_is_multiuser_model located in the model folder defines whether the model is a multi-user or a single-user model. The file includes also the name of the server. You can open the file using any standard text editor.
Overview of the multi-user system A Tekla Structures multi-user system runs on a TCP/IP network and consists of:
• • •
A server computer running xs_server.exe A file server computer containing the master model Client computers running Tekla Structures
The Tekla Structures server The Tekla Structures server program performs these main tasks:
• • •
Distributes ID numbers for new objects Locks the model when somebody saves or numbers the model Identifies client computers
To optimize the performance of a multi-user system, run as few other programs as possible on the Tekla Structures server. This ensures that it processes network requests for object ID numbers efficiently. Server shutdown
Users should save their working models to the master model before the Tekla Structures server is shut down. If the server closes down before saving the working models, simply restart it, then have users save their working models to the master model.
See also
How multi-user works (p. 38) Setting up the multi-user system (p. 39)
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Multi-user mode
37
How multi-user works
The multi-user model consists of a single master model. Each user can access this model and open their own local view of the model. This local view is called a working model. The above image shows one possible configuration of the multi-user system. Any changes a user makes to his working model are local and are not visible to other users until he saves the working model to the master model. The multi-user system can contain several client computers, where users work on their working models. The master model can be located anywhere on the network, including any of the client computers. When you open a multi-user model on a client computer, Tekla Structures makes a copy of the master model and saves it locally on the client computer (a working model). When you click Save to save your working model back to the master model, Tekla Structures: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Takes a new copy of the master model and compares your working model with it. Saves the changes in your working model to the copy of the master model (locally). Saves this copy back to the master model. (Other users can now see your changes.) Takes a new copy of the master model and saves it locally as your working model. (You can see your own changes and those uploaded by other users.)
The multi-user model is locked during opening, saving and numbering. When one of the users performs any of these operations, other users cannot perform them during that time.
Locking To preserve the integrity of the multi-user model, Tekla Structures locks the master model when a user:
• • •
38
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Multi-user mode
Opens the multi-user model Saves a working model to the master model Runs numbering
When you try to save the model when it is locked, Tekla Structures gives you an option to queue for saving until the model is unlocked.
If you click Yes, Tekla Structures displays the following message:
Tekla Structures will keep on retrying every 15 seconds until the operation is completed or until you click Cancel. See also
Saving in multi-user mode (p. 40)
Setting up the multi-user system The following steps outline how to set up a multi-user system: 1.
Install the Tekla Structures multi-user server. For more information, see Multi-user server installation in the Installation Troubleshooting Guide, available in the Extranet and on the Installation DVD.
2.
Set up one computer to run the Tekla Structures server program, xs_server.exe. This program must be launched before anybody opens the multi-user model in Tekla Structures. The xs_server.exe program is installed by default in the folder ..\TeklaStructures\MultiUserServer\.
3. 4. 5.
In the Windows Start menu, go to All Programs > Tekla Structures Multi-user server > Tekla Structures Server to start the Tekla Structures server program. Users can now start working on their copies of the multi-user model. Check the DOS window created by xs_server.exe to check that it is running. This shows all the server activity (for example, who has a model open, etc.).
You can also:
• •
Run the server program from the command prompt using the same command. Click Start on the task bar, select Run... and then type the command.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Multi-user mode
39
We recommend that you make it a common practice to update the xs_server.exe also when updating the client computers with the latest version of Tekla Structures.
See also
Overview of the multi-user system (p. 37) How multi-user works (p. 38)
Saving in multi-user mode Tekla Structures multi-user mode uses a flexible master model and working model concept, rather than more limiting ’file-locking’ technology. See How multi-user works (p. 38) for more information.
Save Tekla Structures preserves the integrity of the model, even if more than one user edits the same model objects. If two users modify the same object, then save to the master model, the master model will only contain the changes of the user who most recently saved their working model to the master model.
To avoid potential save conflicts, have users work on different areas of the model.
Tekla Structures creates connections to the right parts, even if the part is moved by another user.
Autosave Autosave (p. 25) only saves the working model, not the master model. Other users do not see the modifications you make after an Autosave. In multi-user mode, this makes Autosave much faster than the Save command. Save updates the master model. Use Autosave in the following ways: 1. 2.
Go to Tools > Options > Options... > General, and define Autosave intervals for operations performed in the Drawing Editor or while modeling in Autosave. Periodically autosave the model manually. To do so,
•
create a shortcut for the Autosave command, see Defining shortcuts (p. 30) OR
•
add the command to a toolbar, see Toolbars (p. 27).
Remember to save regularly to the master model by clicking Save.
40
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Multi-user mode
See also
Error messages (p. 43) Copying multi-user models (p. 42)
Saving model revision comments You can save model revision comments when working with multi-user models. This means that all objects which have been changed during the last save interval include the revision information in them. You can use this information in filtering and reports. You can also use it to examine which users have modified the objects.
• •
The Owner is the user, who has added the object into the model. History shows when the model has been changed, how the model has changed, who has
made the changes, and the model revision comments. Preconditions
Set the variable XS_SAVE_WITH_COMMENT to TRUE in Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Multi-user. Set the variable XS_COLLECT_MODEL_HISTORY to TRUE in Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Speed and Accuracy. 1.
When you have set the variables mentioned above to TRUE, Tekla Structures displays the Model revision comments dialog box when you are saving the model. Enter the desired revision comment and code in the Model revision comment and Model revision code fields.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Multi-user mode
41
2.
Click OK.
Tekla Structures applies the values of this dialog box to parts that were changed after the last save. When you inquire objects, you can see the model revision information in the Inquire Object dialog box. You can use this information also for selection and view filtering.
To disable the saving model revision comments, add it to the user.ini file without a value. For more information see Disabling variables in an initialization file (p. 60).
Shutting down the model Do not shut down the computer containing the master model while other users are working on their working models. They will not be able to save their changes to the master model. If this does happen, to avoid losing any changes, follow the steps below: 1. 2. 3. 4. See also
Keep the working model(s) open on the client computer(s). Restart the computer containing the master model. Open the master model on the computer containing it and autosave the model. Click Save on the client computers to save the working models to the master model.
Save (p. 40) Autosave (p. 40)
Copying multi-user models To copy a multi-user model: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Have all users save and close their working models. Click File > Open, right-click the multi-user model and select Open as single-user model. Use Save as to make a copy of the model. Exit Tekla Structures and re-open the model in multi-user mode to continue working on it.
Displaying active multi-users You can display information on users working on the same server. To do this: 1.
Click Tools > Active Multi-Users...
The Active Multi-Users dialog box displays the following information:
42
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Multi-user mode
Field
Description
Locked
The time when the model was locked.
Model name
The name of the model.
User
Users that are currently working on models on the server.
Latest login
The time when the users have logged in.
Latest access to server
The time when the users have last accessed the server.
Editing drawings
The drawings that are currently being edited.
Edited drawings
The drawings that have been edited and saved to the server.
The Active Multi-Users dialog box is refreshed every 30 seconds. You can refresh it immediately by clicking Refresh.
Clearing locks You can clear the locks of objects from other users in the multi-user server. Preconditions
To use this feature you need to define the action AllowMultiuserKick and give full permissions to the users that may clear locks in the file privileges.inp located in the folder ..\TeklaStructures\14.0\environments\*your_environment\inp. To clear the locks of a user:
Usage
1.
Click Tools > Active Multi-Users...
2.
Right-click a user whose locks you want to clear and select Clear locks from the pop-up menu.
Result
Using this command removes all the locks the user has on objects. This means that if an application error has occurred on the user’s computer, the locks on locked objects can be cleared.
See also
Locks for drawings (p. 51)
Error messages This section describes the error messages you might come across when you work in multi-user mode, their probable causes, and possible solutions.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Multi-user mode
43
Error message
Problem
Solution
Database write conflicts detected
More than one user has changed an object.
Check the conflict.log. It lists the ID numbers of the objects that more than one user has changed. This is not usually a critical problem. No need to use the Check database tool. See also Save (p. 40).
Could not save model. Possible reasons are:
You tried to save a multiuser model to a computer or folder that you could not access.
•
Check that you have permission to write to the model folder.
•
Check that there is enough disk space to save the model.
•
Restart the computer where you want to save the model. Try to save the model again.
•
Delete the .tmp files from the model directory.
- disk is full or write protected - locked .tmp -file(s) exists in the model directory
Database locked cannot open model
Computer crashed while saving the model, which locks the model.
To unlock the model, the user whose system crashed should open the model in multi-user mode and save it.
Recommendations Here are some recommendations on how to optimize your multi-user setup. Server computer
The Tekla Structures server does not have a high workload and can be run on a relatively low specification computer. You do not need a commercial network file server. Its main task is to process network requests for object ID numbers. See The Tekla Structures server (p. 37) for more information.
Client computer
Have as much RAM as possible (2 Gb or more). This speeds up saving in multi-user mode. See Save (p. 40) to find out more about the multi-user save process. We also recommend using a fast processor, particularly for computers where you run numbering. LVD (Low Voltage Differential) drives speed up the saving and opening of models).
Network
Ensure that the TCP/IP protocols are set correctly:
• •
44
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Multi-user mode
Each PC on the same network has a unique ID number Each PC on the same network has an identical Subnet mask
To find the IP address of a computer, type ipconfig at the DOS prompt.
Model dump
Always import model dumps in single-user mode. After the import you are prompted to save and re-open the model. Re-open the model as a multi-user model, and continue your work. For more information see Switching between single-user and multi-user modes (p. 36).
2.2 Modeling in multi-user mode This section describes aspects of modeling in Tekla Structures that are specific to multi-user mode. Topics
Working with a master model (p. 45) Numbering setup (p. 48) Numbering – specific cases (p. 50)
Working with a master model Before you start a project, assign each user an area of the model. To prevent potential save conflicts, you need to avoid having more than one user working on the same, or adjacent model objects. See also Saving in multi-user mode (p. 40). Example
If three users are to model a project, User #1 could model columns, User #2 the 1st floor beams, and User #3 the 2nd floor beams. In the following example, three users are working on the same model. You can see how modeling and saving works in practice. The master model contains columns and grids, as you can see here. Each user opens the model in multi-user mode. All users are now working on working models, locally.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Multi-user mode
45
On the working models: User #1 adds base plates to the columns:
User #2 adds and connects the 1st floor steel beams:
User #3 adds and connects the 2nd floor steel beams:
46
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Multi-user mode
User #1 clicks Save to save to the master model. His working model now shows the base plates he added and looks like this:
User #2 clicks Save to save to the master model. His working model now shows his 1st floor framing and User #1’s base plates:
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Multi-user mode
47
User #3 clicks Save to save to the master model. His working model now shows all three users’s work:
To see the updated master model, Users #1 and #2 need to save to the master model again to update their working models.
Numbering setup We strongly recommend that you do not carry out numbering on more than one computer working on the multi-user model, but if you do so, number newly created parts before saving to the master model. This is because numbering modifies the part. If you save unnumbered parts and continue working with them, some other user may number the model, including your new parts, and save to the master model, and thus overwrite your modifications. Define the numbering settings as follows:
48
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Multi-user mode
1. 2.
Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Numbering Settings.... In the Numbering setup dialog box, select the Synchronize with master model (savenumbering-save) check box. When you select this check box, you can cancel the numbering before the last save is made. This is useful, for example, if you want to check the numbering results and you find something that you still want to change.
When working with multi-user models, use this option always to prevent saving conflicts.
3. 4.
Modify the other properties as required. Click OK. Tekla Structures will now save the model before and after you run full numbering, or number modified parts.
When you run numbering by clicking Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Number All Parts (Full Numbering), Tekla Structures displays a list that shows the numbering progress. When the numbering is finished, the changed numbering results are highlighted in the list.
When you select an item on the list, Tekla Structures highlights the corresponding object(s) in the model. If you keep the F key pressed when you select the item, Tekla Structures fits the work area of the current view around the objects. If the numbering results are correct, click Save numbers to make the second save. To cancel the numbering before the second save, click Cancel. If you cancel the numbering, the model is returned to the state before numbering and standard files are read to all dialogs. To review the numbering results further, click Stop timer. To change the time frame in which Tekla Structures makes the second save, use the variable XS_NUMBERING_RESULTS_DIALOG_DISPLAY_TIME. See also
Controlling access to numbering setup (p. 55)
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Multi-user mode
49
Numbering – specific cases If you need to include numbering information from areas in the model that have been modeled by other users: 1. 2.
Ask all users to save their working models. This updates the master model. Number the model. Make sure that the Synchronize with master model (savenumbering-save) check box is selected in the Numbering setup dialog box (see Numbering setup (p. 48)). This updates your working model to the master model, numbers the master model, and then saves the numbered master model for all users to access.
If you create drawings and/or reports after numbering, you need to save the master model again to make them visible to other users.
2.3 Drawings in multi-user mode The multi-user environment is very useful when several users are simultaneously editing drawings. This section describes aspects of drawing production that are specific to multi-user mode. Topics
About drawing files (p. 50) Guidelines for multi-user drawings (p. 51)
About drawing files Tekla Structures saves each drawing in a unique file. These drawing files are located in the drawing folder in the master model folder.
The file is in the format D0000123456.dg. dg files are part of the model, so you can only open them using the Tekla Structures drawing editor. dg files contain the locations of views, details of any editing done to the drawing, and the positions of dimensions, part marks, and text. The dg filename does not contain any reference to assembly, part, or multi-drawing numbers. If two users open and save the same drawing in their working models, then save their changes to the master model, one set of changes will be lost. The master model will only contain the changes of the user who most recently saved their working model to the master model. See Saving in multi-user mode (p. 40). The Tekla Structures server program xs_server.exe assigns the general arrangement drawing numbers automatically. This means that each drawing gets the first free number available. If users A and B both create a general arrangement drawing at the same time, they are automatically assigned different numbers. The same applies to multi-drawing numbers.
50
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Multi-user mode
Guidelines for multi-user drawings You may find the following guidelines useful when you edit or check drawings:
Action
Recommendation
Saving drawings
Periodically save your working model to the master model (every 5–10 drawings).
Editing drawings
•
Assign each user a different range of drawings to edit.
• •
Lock finalized drawings. If Tekla Structures displays the message Database write conflicts detected and a drawing ID number, two or more users have opened and saved the same drawing. See About drawing files (p. 50).
Checking drawings
Only check locked drawings.
Printing drawings
Make sure that no-one else is working with the same drawing. If you print a drawing while someone else is editing it and then save the model, the other user’s changes will be lost, even though you have not opened, modified, or saved the drawing. You can disable the print date by using the variable XS_DISABLE_DRAWING_PLOT_DATE.
Locks for drawings When you are about to open a drawing, Tekla Structures displays a notification on the status of the drawing. The options are:
• •
Someone is already editing it.
•
The drawing has already been saved and there is a newer version available on the server.
Someone has already edited it (drawing has been saved to their computer, but not yet to the server).
Locks for drawings are only used when a drawing is edited manually, not for example when drawings are automatically edited through cloning.
See also
Clearing locks (p. 43)
2.4 Maintenance procedures This section contains advice on maintaining your multi-user model. Topics
Checking multi-user databases (p. 52) Deleting unnecessary drawing files (p. 52)
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Multi-user mode
51
Checking multi-user databases To preserve the integrity of your multi-user model, you need to remove any inconsistencies from the multi-user database at regular intervals, for example once a day. This may also fix assemblies with no main part and drawings of unknown (U) type. To remove inconsistencies from a multi-user database: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Have all other users exit the multi-user model. Save your model to receive the modifications of other users. Click Tools > Diagnose & Repair Model > Repair Model. Save the model. Exit the model.
We recommend that you check the multi-user databases regularly.
Deleting unnecessary drawing files Every time you update a drawing, Tekla Structures creates a new drawing (.dg) file in the drawings sub-folder of the model. After that, the previous drawing file is not used. By default all unnecessary drawing files are deleted automatically after seven days. This is defined with the variable XS_DELETE_UNNECESSARY_DG_FILES in your user.ini file located in the ..\TeklaStructures\*version*\nt\bin\ folder. The time frame after which unnecessary drawing files are deleted can be defined with the variable XS_DELETE_UNNECESSARY_DG_FILES_SAFETY_PERIOD.
For additional safety, drawing files that are less than seven days old are not deleted.
2.5 Access rights You can protect user-defined attributes using privileges. You can also protect your model and drawings from accidental changes using a lock attribute. Using the lock attribute and privileges together you can even restrict some users or organizations from modifying your model. For example, you can limit access to the model so that a checker can only change status attributes. Or you could prevent certain users from changing the user-defined attributes used for approval or manufacturing and erection status. Topics
Locking objects (p. 53) Controlling access to attributes (p. 53) Restricting access to model (p. 54)
52
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Multi-user mode
Locking objects To protect objects from being accidentally changed, you can use a user-defined attribute called a lock attribute. You can use it for:
• • • • • •
parts (separately for beams, columns etc.) bolts welds specific drawing types project properties phase properties
The lock attribute has two values, Yes and No. When set to Yes, the object is locked and you cannot modify its properties. You can only change the object’s user-defined attributes that do not affect numbering. If you try to modify a locked object, Tekla Structures shows the message "There are locked objects, see report. The operation could not be performed." and a report on access rights. To add the lock attribute to the user interface, you need to add the following line in the object’s section in the objects.inp: objects.inp attribute("OBJECT_LOCKED", "Locked:", option,"%s", none, none, "0.0", "0.0") { value("No", 1) value("Yes", 0) }
Make sure that numbering is up-to-date before you lock objects.
For more information on objects.inp, see Adding properties (p. 77) and Interpreting objects.inp (p. 80).
Controlling access to attributes Use the privileges.inp file to control access to user-defined attributes. It is a standard text file that you can open using any text editor. Tekla Structures searches for the file first in the current model folder, then in the folder defined by the variable XS_INP. Below is an example file:
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Multi-user mode
53
privileges.inp attribute:APPROVED_BYCOMPANYA/full attribute:APPROVED_BYCOMPANYB/view attribute:APPROVED_BYeveryonenone attribute:STATUSCOMPANYB/full attribute:STATUSCOMPANYA/view attribute:STATUSeveryonenone
Each row contains three columns, separated by tabs:
Column
Option
Description
protected user-defined attribute
attribute:name
Affects the user-defined attribute "name". Check the exact spelling of the name in the objects.inp.
user
everyone
All users
domain/
Affects all users within the network domain "domain".
domain/nn
Affects the user "nn" in the network domain "domain".
nn
Affects the user "nn".
full
User can change the user-defined attribute.
view
User can view the user-defined attribute, but not change it. The field is grayed out to the user.
none
The user-defined attribute is hidden from the user.
rights
If you do not set any privileges, all users have full rights. Tekla Structures checks the privilege defaults in the input file privileges.inp when you create a model, and each time you open a model. Changing rights
If you need to the change the privileges, just change the privileges.inp file and re-open the model. However, you can only change the privileges of the objects the organization owns.
Only the person who created the model can modify its privileges.inp file.
Restricting access to model To prevent a user from changing object properties, set their access to the lock attribute to none in the privileges.inp. In this example, privileges.inp gives the users "man" and "man2" full rights to lock and unlock objects, but hides that attribute from everybody else:
54
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Multi-user mode
privileges.inp attribute:OBJECT_LOCKEDeveryonenone attribute:OBJECT_LOCKEDmanfull attribute:OBJECT_LOCKEDman2full
To protect other user-defined attributes, you need to list them in the privileges.inp.
See also
Locking objects (p. 53) Controlling access to attributes (p. 53)
Controlling access to numbering setup To prevent unauthorized users from modifying the numbering settings, restrict their access to the numbering properties in the privileges.inp file.
Users can still run numbering even if they have no privilege to modify the numbering settings.
To control access to the numbering properties: Usage
1.
Open the privileges.inp file in any text editor. The file is located in the ..\environments\*your_environment*\inp folder.
2.
Make the required changes in the file. You can set values to the attribute action:PartnumbersOptions.
The option view cannot be used for controlling access to the numbering properties.
3.
Save the file.
Result
If a user who has no privilege to modify properties in the Numbering Setup dialog box tries to access the dialog box, Tekla Structures displays a warning message, which states that the user does not have the required privilege.
Example
In this example, only the administrator can modify the properties in the Numbering Setup dialog box: privileges.inp action:PartnumbersOptions everyone action:PartnumbersOptions ORGANIZATION\admin
none full
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Multi-user mode
55
See also
56
Controlling access to attributes (p. 53)
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Multi-user mode
3
Introduction
Files and Folders
This chapter explains where Tekla Structures stores information. It describes the file types Tekla Structures contains and how to use files to customize Tekla Structures. You will also find out how to use model, project and firm folders effectively. It also explains how the initialization files work and how you can use them to customize Tekla Structures. This chapter also includes information on the various log files and how to interpret them.
Assumed background
We assume that you have experience using Windows Explorer to manage files and folders. You should also know how to use a standard file editor, such as Wordpad.
Organization
This chapter is divided into the following sections:
• • • • •
Initialization files (p. 57) File types and function (p. 64) Folders (p. 71) Customizing Tekla Structures (p. 77) Log files (p. 89)
3.1 Initialization files Initialization files are used to launch Tekla Structures. They can contain many variables that you can use to configure Tekla Structures for different standards and your own style of working. Tekla Structures automatically creates the necessary initialization files during installation.The number of initialization files it creates depends on how many country-specific environments you choose to install. We recommend that you make all your customizations in the user.ini file, which is located in the ..\TeklaStructures\ 15.0\nt\bin folder. This way the customizations are kept when you install the next version of Tekla Structures. Topics
About variables (p. 58) Structure (p. 60)
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Files and Folders
57
Creating shortcuts (p. 62) See also
Variables
About variables Tekla Structures contains two kinds of variables, user variables and system variables. User variables
User variables set your personal preferences, for example the appearance of the Tekla Structures window. Tekla Structures saves user variable settings in the options_.ini file, located in the TeklaStructures\*version\nt\bin folder.
System variables
options.ini contains the settings for system variables. It is located in the current model folder. To share your settings with other people, copy options.ini to the system, project or firm folders.
If required, Tekla Structures prompts you to restart Tekla Structures when you change a variable setting,
Setting variables Use variables to configure Tekla Structures to suit the way you work, or to comply with specific project requirements or industry standards. You can set variables by: Using the Advanced Options dialog box (p. 58) OR Editing the user.ini file (p. 59) We recommend that you only use one of these methods to set variables. The variable settings in the Advanced options dialog box override those in the initialization files.
If required, Tekla Structures prompts you to restart Tekla Structures when you change a variable setting.
Using the Advanced Options dialog box To set a variable using the Advanced Options dialog box: 1. 2. 3.
58
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Files and Folders
Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options... to open the Advanced Options dialog box. Browse the categories to find the variable you want to set. Set the variable, then click Apply or OK in the Advanced Options dialog box.
You can retrieve the values defined for variables in templates by using the GetValue function. For example, to use different format in output depending on whether you have set the variable XS_IMPERIAL, use the following rule: if(GetValue("ADVANCED_OPTION.XS_IMPERIAL") then format("Formatting options for imperial") else format("Formatting options for metric") endif
Editing the user.ini file To set a variable in the user.ini file: 1.
Locate the variable in the ..\TeklaStructures\*version*\nt\bin\user.ini file. Check that it is set and has the value you want to use.
• • 2.
3.
If it is has, you can stop here. To change or add the variable, follow steps 2 to 5.
Right-click the ..\TeklaStructures\*version*\nt\bin\user.ini file in Windows Explorer and click Open with.... Select a standard text editor from the list of available programs. On a new line, type set, then the name of the variable followed by its value in a single line. Tekla Structures only reads lines in the initialization file that start with set, for example, set XS_DIR=C:\TeklaStructures\15.0.
4. 5.
Save user.ini. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the variable.
You must restart Tekla Structures after changing the initialization file for the changes to take effect.
Different variables use different switches in Tekla Structures. To check which switch a variable uses, check Appendix C, Variables.
Switc h
Value
TRUE FALSE
Example set XS_DISABLE_WELD_PREP_SOLID=TRUE set XS_UNDERLINE_AFTER_POSITION_NUMBER_IN_H ARDSTAMP=FALSE
1
On
set XS_SINGLE_CLOSE_DIMENSIONS=1
0
Off
set XS_SINGLE_USE_WORKING_POINTS=0
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Files and Folders
59
Switc h
Value
Example
string
set XS_USER_DEFINED_BOLT_SYMBOL_TABLE=bolt_ symbol_table.txt
number
set XS_DEFAULT_FONT_SIZE=12
When you are moving to a new version of Tekla Structures, you can use the Migration Wizard to automatically copy your user.ini file to the new version. The Migration Wizard appears once you start Tekla Structures for the first time after installation.
Disabling variables in an initialization file To disable a variable, add it to the user.ini file without a value. Do not add any spaces or characters after the equals sign. See the example below: set XS_SINGLE_CLOSE_DIMENSIONS=
In previous versions you could disable a variable by adding "rem" before it. This does not disable the variable, if the same variable is set in the other initialization files. rem set XS_AUTOSAVE_DIRECTORY=%XS_RUNPATH%\autosave
Structure This section describes the location and folder and hierarchical structure of different initialization files.
60
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Files and Folders
teklastructures.ini in the bin folder calls the other initialization files in the environments subfolders. Add your own settings to user.ini in the bin folder. teklastructures.in i
The file teklastructures.ini in the bin folder starts Tekla Structures.
env_global_defau lt.ini
The file env_global_default.ini is used as a default for all environments. New options can be added in this file until they are localized and specified differently in environment-specific initialization files.
env_.ini
The env_.ini files in the environments subfolders contain all the variables that have environment-specific settings.
user.ini
The user.ini file is where you save your personal settings. The variables in user.ini override those in other ini files. For example, if you have set the same variable in an .ini file in a file in environments subfolder and the user.ini file, Tekla Structures uses the value in the user.ini file.
See Variables for details of all variables.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Files and Folders
61
Default settings
teklastructures.ini and the .ini files in the environmentssub folders contain default settings. Tekla Structures creates them automatically during installation. We recommend that you do not modify these files.
Initialization file reading order The initialization files are read in the following order during startup: 1. 2. 3.
Program settings: .../nt/bin/TeklaStructures.ini Language-specific settings: .../nt/bin/lang_.ini Environment and other settings: all .ini files given as program startup parameters (in the given order)
Creating customized initialization files You can create customer-specific initialization files that include custom settings particular to each customer, a company and/or a single project. You can also create customized initialization files for multi-user mode as needed. To do this: 1.
Open the user.ini file located in the folder..\TeklaStructures\ 15.0\nt\bin using any standard text editor. Save the file with the required name, such as customer.inior project.ini.
2.
Edit the file by adding the required customer settings.
3.
Save the modified initialization file.
Including other initialization files Initialization files can include or call other initialization files. You can use this functionality to create shortcuts for different purposes, for example to have different setup files depending on the client you are working for in a project such as fabricators. Below is an example of a project initialization file that calls other initialization files. MyProject.ini: // The project is based on the default US imperial settings call c:\TeklaStructures\13.1\environments\usimp\env_usimp.ini // ..but our company policy requires these changes call c:\CompanySettings\OurPolicy.ini // ..and the fabricator requires something call c:\Fabricators\Fabricator1.ini // ..and then we let users to make some changes (bg color etc.) call c:\Users\user_%USERNAME%.ini
The project shortcut for MyProject: C:\TeklaStructures\13.1\nt\bin\TeklaStructures.exe -i \\MyServer\MyProject\MyProject.ini \\MyServer\MyProject\MyModel\MyModel.db1
Creating shortcuts Shortcuts are used to start teklastructures.exe with defined initializations. The Tekla Structures installation automatically creates shortcuts for the selected environments. To create a project-specific shortcut: 1.
Make a copy of the default shortcut. In the Windows Start menu, go to All Programs > Tekla Structures > Tekla Structures and right-click.
2.
62
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Files and Folders
Select Copy from the pop-up menu.
3.
Paste the shortcut to your desktop.
4.
Select the shortcut and right-click.
5.
Select Properties... from the pop-up menu.
6.
Modify the Target of the shortcut by adding the required project initializations to it.
You can use the following parameters in shortcuts:
•
-i InitializationFile: Initialization file to be read during startup, for example: -i \\MyServer\MyProject\Project1.ini. You can repeat this parameter as many times
as you need.
•
ModelToBeOpened: Full path to the model to be opened automatically.
The maximum length of a shortcut is 256 characters. If you have problems with this, you can include other necessary initialization files from your project initialization file instead of adding them to the shortcut. For more information see Including other initialization files (p. 62).
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Files and Folders
63
3.2 File types and function This section describes the various types of file Tekla Structures uses and explains their uses and location. Topics
Input files (p. 64) Data files (p. 65) DSTV connection properties (p. 68) Messages (p. 68) Profiles (p. 69) Bin (p. 70) Fonts (p. 70) Symbols (p. 70) System (p. 71)
Input files Tekla Structures uses input files to control dialog boxes, as well as how components work. All input files have the extension inp.
File
Description
More information
objects.inp
Controls the user-defined attributes
Adding properties (p. 77)
profitab.inp
Contains available parametric profiles
Customizing parametric profiles (p. 83)
fltprops.inp
Includes materials and dimensions of available flat bars
Using flat bars (p. 87)
pop_mark_parts. inp
Contains settings for popmarking
Pop-mark settings (p. 163)
privileges.inp
Controls access rights.
Controlling access to attributes (p. 53)
rebar_config.in p
Contains settings for reinforcement marks
rebar_schedule_ config.inp
Contains internal bending types of reinforcing bars and their mapping to area specific bending codes..
analysis_design _config.inp
Contains settings for analysis and design
Reinforcing bar bending types
Component description files Tekla Structures uses component description files to define the properties of system components. As a general rule, you should not modify these files, as they affect the operation of system components. See When to modify (p. 65).
64
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Files and Folders
These files are located in the folder: ..\applications\steel1\ and ..\applications\steel2\ There is one input file for each component toolbar. For example, xs_page_10.inp controls the components on toolbar 10. When to modify
You will only need to modify component description files in the following circumstances:
•
If you add step profiles to the steps.dat file, you should change the xs_page_10.inp file to reflect those changes. If you do not, Tekla Structures will not display the changes in the Steps dialog box. See also Example 1: Stairs (S82) (p. 66).
•
If you modify the Stanchion connection type used in handrailing (1024). See Example 2: Handrailing (1024) (p. 67) for more information.
Data files Tekla Structures reads data files from the system folder. See System folder (p. 75). These files contains data used by certain modeling tools and details. They are:
File
Description
joints.dat
Contains the data used in detail 1024 and modeling tool S76. Used in the Stanchion connection type field
railings.dat
Contains the data for railing detail 1025. This information is used in the the railing type field.
stairs.dat
Contains the data for the modeling tool S83. Used in the Stair type field
steps.dat
Contains the data for modeling tool S82. Used in the Step profile field
std_flange_plate s.dat
Contains the detail used in modeling tool S99. Used in the fields:
• • •
Outer flange profile Inner flange profile Top plate profile
std_stiffener_pl ates.dat
Contains the data used in modeling tool S99. Used in the Horizontal stiffener profile field
marketsize.dat
Contains available market sizes for certain material grade. Can be used with fMarketSize() function in the custom component editor. See also Using market sizes (p. 89).
These files affect the operation of modeling tools and details.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Files and Folders
65
Data files and modeling tools Here are two examples of how data files and modeling tools work together.
You can open data (*.dat) files using a standard text editor. Tekla Structures lists the information in data files in text columns. You will find an explanation of the column names at the beginning of each data file. Example 1: Stairs (S82)
The modeling tool Stairs (S82) is on component toolbar 10, so we need to look at the file xs_page_10.inp. See Component description files (p. 64). The entry for Stairs (S82) in the xs_page_10.inp file starts: attribute("step_index", "j_step_profile", option,"%s", none, none,"0.0", "0.0")
Next Tekla Structures lists the options that appear in the Step profile field in the Tekla Structures Stairs (82) dialog box: { value("DEFAULT", 1) value("PLAIN50x200", value("PLAIN50x210", value("PLAIN50x220", value("PLAIN50x300", etc...
0) 0) 0) 0)
Tekla Structures gets additional information to create the object from the file steps.dat. It reads the information in by line number, not name.
Do not change the line order in data files or modeling tool description files.
The option PLAIN50X200 in the Step profile field in the Stairs (S82) dialog box appears on line two of the xs_page_10.inp file. If you pick this option, Tekla Structures reads in the information from line 2 of the steps.dat file.
66
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Files and Folders
Line 2
You can open data (*.dat) files using a standard text editor. Tekla Structures lists the information in data files in text columns. You will find an explanation of the column names at the beginning of each data file. Example 2: Handrailing (1024)
Handrailing detail 1024 is on toolbar 10, so we need to look at the file xs_page_10.inp. See Component description files (p. 64). The entry for handrailing 1024 in the file xs_page_10.inp starts: tab_page("","jd_Parameters",3) { attribute("cut2", "j_railing_type", option, "%s", none, none, "0.0","0.0")
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Files and Folders
67
Next Tekla Structures lists the options that appear in the Stanchion connection type field in the Handrailing (1024) and Stanchions (S76) dialog boxes: value("j_Default", 2) value("j_auto", 1) value("j_MONO_S", 0) value("j_MONO_SC", 0) value("j_MONO_SO", 0) etc...
Tekla Structures gets additional information to create the object from the file joints.dat. It reads the information in by line number, not name.
Do not change the line order in data files or component description files.
The joints.dat file contains the following fields:
Field
Description
index
For info only. Tekla Structures reads information in by line number, not index number
name
For info only. Tekla Structures reads information in by line number, not name
joint number
Number of the connection to use
attribute name
Name of the connection attribute file to use
updirection origin type
If railing type and stringer collide use COLLISION, otherwise use MIDDLE
double bolts
0 indicates that the connection only uses one bolt group 1 indicates that the connection uses two bolt groups
DSTV connection properties The file ..\environments\common\inp\dstv.lis contains the properties for different DSTV standard connections.
Do not change this file, as the information it contains is based on European standards.
Messages Tekla Structures uses the information in the message files to display messages in the user interface. The message files for different languages are located in ..\TeklaStructures\14.0\messages.
68
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Files and Folders
All message files have the file extension ail.
See also Customizing message files (p. 81).
Profiles Tekla Structures uses ASCII and binary files to manage profiles. Each environment has its own profile folder. For example, ..\environments\uk\profil\ contains the files for managing profiles used in the United Kingdom. You can edit ASCII files using a standard text editor. Information in the binary files can only be changed via the user interface. This section describes the various file types in the ..\profil\ folder.
inp (ASCII) profitab.inp
The file profitab.inp defines the names that you can use for parametric profiles. Tekla Structures searches for this file in the standard search order (see Folder search order (p. 73)) and then the folder indicated by the variable XS_PROFDB in the initialization file. See also Customizing parametric profiles (p. 83).
rebar_database.i np
The file rebar_database.inp contains details of the reinforcement used in concrete structures. It includes both the standard bending radii and the standard hook dimensions. See also The reinforcing bar catalog (p. 122).
mesh_database.i np
The file mesh_database.inp contains details of the reinforcement meshes used in concrete structures. See also Reinforcement mesh.
cnv (ASCII) Tekla Structures uses the information in cnv files to convert materials and profiles when transferring model information using links. For example, when you use the PML or HLI links, Tekla Structures reads the cnv files from the folder indicated by the variable XS_PROFDB in the initialization file.
lis (ASCII) Tekla Structures creates lis files when you export bolt, profile and material catalogs. See also Merging profile catalogs (p. 108) and Merging bolt catalogs (p. 121).
Binary files Tekla Structures stores catalog information in the binary files, which have the file extension bin. Tekla Structures searches for these files in the following folder search order
• • • •
Model Project Firm Folder indicated by the variable XS_PROFDB in the initialization file.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Files and Folders
69
This means that if Tekla Structures finds binary catalog files in the current model folder it does not use the catalogs located in the folder indicated by the variable XS_PROFDB in the initialization file.
If you want to make catalogs available to other users, we recommend that you save catalogs in the project or firm folders. See Project and firm folders (p. 75). These are the binary catalog files:
File
Description
assdb.db
Bolt assembly catalog
profdb.bin
Profile catalog
matdb.bin
Material catalog
screwdb.db
Bolt catalog
Bin The folder ..\nt\bin\ contains Tekla Structures executable files and the Symbol, Drawing, Report and Template Editors. It also contains some support files for Tekla Structures editors.
Fonts The variable DXK_FONTPATH in the initialization file should point to this folder. It includes the graphic fonts:
• • •
romsim romco fixfont
The Template Editor always searches the folder indicated by the variable DXK_FONTPATH, even if you configure it to also search other folders. The variable TEMPLATE_FONT_CONVERSION_FILE points to the the conversion file Tekla Structures uses to map Tekla Structures fonts to Windows fonts. Windows fonts must have the extension ttf and be located in the ..\windows\fonts folder.
Symbols The folder ..\environments\common\symbols\ contains the Tekla Structures symbol files. There are two types of symbol files, sym and dwg. The Symbol Editor creates sym files. dwg files contain the symbols Tekla Structures displays in rendered views (for example, connection, point and origin symbols). The variable DXK_SYMBOLPATH in the initialization file should point to this folder.
70
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Files and Folders
The Template Editor always searches for symbols in the folder indicated by the variable DXK_SYMBOLPATH.
System The folder ..\environments\*your_environment*\system\ includes several file types:
rpt Report templates you create with the Template Editor.
tpl Drawing template files you create with the Template Editor.
lay Layout definitions you create with the Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Drawing Layout... option.
plotdev.bin This file contains the print device definitions you create using File > Print... > Printer Catalog.... See The printer catalog. The definitions in the system folder are accesible to all users. You can also save printer definitions in the current model folder or the project and firm folders. See Project and firm folders (p. 75). Tekla Structures searches for plotdev.bin in the model, project and firm folders, then the folder indicated by the variable XS_DRIVER.
Wizard files (dproc) Tekla Structures wizard files automate drawing creation by performing a series of actions you would otherwise have to perform manually. Wizard files have the file extension dproc. Tekla Structures searches the system folder (see System folder (p. 75)) for wizard files. See also Creating AutoDrawings wizard files (p. 85).
3.3 Folders This section describes how Tekla Structures stores the files associated with a model and explains how to use folders to manage files, including those you customize to project and company specifications. Topics
Folder structure (p. 72) Folder search order (p. 73) Model folder (p. 74) System folder (p. 75) Project and firm folders (p. 75)
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Files and Folders
71
Template folder (p. 76)
Folder structure This is a quick reference to the default locations for folders and files discussed in this section. You will find more detailed information on files and folders throughout this chapter.
Catalog files System folder Firm folder Message files Bin folder Project folder Model folder
72
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Files and Folders
Folder search order When you open a model, Tekla Structures searches for the associated files in specific folders in a set order. It is important that you locate files in the correct folders. Once Tekla Structures finds the associated files, it stops searching. So files that have the same name but are located lower down the search order are ignored. The folder search order is:
Folder
Defined by
Current model
The open model
Project
variable XS_PROJECT
Firm
variable XS_FIRM
System
variable XS_SYSTEM
Tekla Structures does not search for certain files in exactly this order. The exceptions are listed below. The table also includes links to more information. The exceptions are:
File (type)
More information
objects.inp
Adding properties (p. 77)
*.dat files
Data files (p. 65)
Templates
Search order:
• • • • • •
XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY
Model folder XS_PROJECT XS_FIRM XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY_SYSTEM XS_SYSTEM
For more information, see Template folder (p. 76) Catalogs
Profile, bolt, material and reinforcement catalogs. Search order:
• • • •
Model folder XS_PROJECT XS_FIRM
Folder indicated by the variable XS_PROFDB
For more information, see Binary files (p. 69).
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Files and Folders
73
Do not use the system folder to store customizes files. You will avoid having problems or doing a lot of unecessary work when you upgrade. See System folder (p. 75) and Project and firm folders (p. 75).
Model folder Tekla Structures stores all files associated with a model in a folder it creates with the same name as the model database file (*.db1). In multi-user mode all users access the same model folder. To view the files in the model folder, click File > Open model folder.
Saved attributes When you change object properties, templates, reports, connections, etc. and then click Save or Save as in the dialog box, Tekla Structures saves the changed files in the current model folder in the attributes sub-folder. See also Project and firm folders (p. 75) and Folder search order (p. 73). Tekla Structures creates the following files in the model folder:
74
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Files and Folders
File/extension
Description
db1
The model database. Tekla Structures uses the filename without the extension to name the model folder.
db2
Numbering database. The filename without the extension should be the same as the model folder.
xslib.db1
Contains user-defined connections and details. Can be copied from one model folder to another.
xslib.db2
Stores numbering information.
xs_user.user_name
Contains interface settings for each user, such as drag and drop settings.
xsdb.xs
When you open a project database, Tekla Structures displays the name in the Open dialog box, if it finds this file in the current model folder.
bak
Tekla Structures saves a backup copy of the model databases each time you save the model. To restore a previous version of the model, rename the *.bak file to *.db1.
File/extension
Description
dg
Located in the sub-folder ..\drawings under the model folder. These are drawing files, which include information on how each drawing was created. Tekla Structures also stores information on current drawings in the model database. Opening or printing a drawing opens the corresponding *.dg file. Do not manually delete *.dg files. Tekla Structures deletes *.dg files when you delete a drawing.
xsr
Tekla Structures reports
nc1
Neutral files in DSTV format for NC tooling machines. The filename consists of the part mark and this extension. You can change the file extension in the NC files dialog box Tekla Structures displays when you click File > Export > CNC > Create NC Files.... By default it is nc1.
Log files
See Log files (p. 89)
.This_is_multiuser_ model
Contains information about the PC running xs_server.exe. Do not alter or delete this file in normal circumstances. If, you move a model to a different server, you should delete this file. Tekla Structures generates a new file with the same name.
System folder The system folder contains templates for drawings and reports and object settings and properties. Files in the system folder are read-only. See Project and firm folders (p. 75) and Folder search order (p. 73). The location of the system folder is defined by the variable XS_SYSTEM in the initialization file.
Do not store customized files in the system folder. Tekla Structures may replace these files when you install a new release. This is not the case with files in the project and firm folders. See Project and firm folders (p. 75).
Project and firm folders You can create project and firm folders for customized files. This is a useful technique if you want to store the files for future use, or want to retain them when you install a new release. Property files are always saved in the attributes folder under the current model folder, for example, ..\TeklaStructuresModels\my_building\attributes. You can copy these files to the project or firm folders. See Folder search order (p. 73) for important information on where to locate files.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Files and Folders
75
Tekla Structures does not replace files in the project and firm folders when you install a new release, so you retain your customized files without having to cut and paste, or export and import from previous versions. Create firm and project folders for example on the same level as the Tekla Structures folder and make them available in all versions using variables: XS_PROJECT and XS_FIRM.
Project folder The project folder is where you should store files you customize for a particular project.The location of the project folder is defined by the variable XS_PROJECT in the initialization file. See also Folder search order (p. 73). You need to create a project folder manually, then edit the variable XS_PROJECT to point to that folder.
Firm folder Use the firm folder to store files customized for a particular organization or company. The location of the firm folder is defined by the variable XS_FIRM in the initialization file. See also Folder search order (p. 73). You need to create a firm folder manually, then edit the variable XS_FIRM to point to it. Example
You regularly work for a company that has specific drawing layout standards it expects you to use. Customize the drawing templates once for the company and save them in a sub-folder located under the firm folder. You can then use the customized drawing templates for all future projects for that company. And all users can access the customized files.
Template folder Tekla Structures searches for the Template Editor v. 3.3 templates and reports in the following order:
Folder
Defined by variable
Folder containing your templates
XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY
Model Project
XS_PROJECT
Firm
XS_FIRM
Environment-specific system templates
XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY_SYSTEM
System
XS_SYSTEM
To modify the variables, click Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > File Locations. Tekla Structures searches for version 2.2 templates in two locations, in XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY and in the first folder containing templates:
• • • • •
76
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Files and Folders
model project firm system templates system
When Tekla Structures finds a template in one of these folders, it stops searching.
3.4 Customizing Tekla Structures This section explains how to customize Tekla Structures. It covers the following subjects: Adding properties (p. 77) Interpreting objects.inp (p. 80) Customizing message files (p. 81) Customizing parametric profiles (p. 83) Save defaults (p. 84) Creating AutoDrawings wizard files (p. 85) Unfolding parameters (p. 86) Using flat bars (p. 87) Using market sizes (p. 89)
See Project and firm folders (p. 75).
Adding properties Many dialog boxes contain user-defined attributes for various objects, including beams, columns, bolts and drawings, in Tekla Structures. You can use the ..\environments\country_independent\inp\objects.inp file to define your own attributes for these objects. Tekla Structures displays these fields when you click User defined attributes or the User attributes tab in the relevant dialog box. You can then use these values in reports and drawings. When you upgrade Tekla Structures, the user-defined attributes that you have added in the objects.inp file in the previous version of Tekla Structures are automatically copied to version 15.0 or later. The objects.inp file reads attributes in order from the folders listed in the table below starting with the model folder:
Folder
Defined by variable
Model Project
XS_PROJECT
Firm
XS_FIRM
System
XS_SYSTEM
inp
XS_INP
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Files and Folders
77
The files are merged so that if there are user-defined attributes in any of the files, they are displayed in the user interface. Tekla Structures merges the files in a way that eliminates duplicate attributes. If Tekla Structures encounters the same attribute name in different objects.inp files, the attribute from the first read objects.inp file will be used.
You should only edit the user-defined fields in the objects.inp file. Do not change other standard field names or values.
For more information
Interpreting objects.inp (p. 80) Fields in objects.inp (p. 81) Locking objects (p. 53)
Changing user-defined fields You can customize existing User fields shown in dialog boxes. You can also add more userdefined fields. See also User-defined fields in templates (p. 79). Example
You want to change the name of the user-defined attribute User Field 1 in the Column dialog box, which by default looks like this:
Steps
1. 2.
Open the objects.inp file using a standard text editor. Find the section: /******************************************************/ /* Part attributes */ /******************************************************/
3.
Each attribute is listed on a new line and starts with the word attribute. Find the line: attribute("USER_FIELD_1", "j_user_field_1", string, "%s", no, none, "0.0", "0.0")
4.
Change the line to read: attribute("MY_INFO_1", "My Info 1", string, "%s", no, none, "0.0", "0.0")
78
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Files and Folders
Attribute names must be unique. The maximum number of characters in a name is 19.
5. 6.
Save the objects.inp file. Close Tekla Structures and restart the program for the changes to take effect. The Column properties dialog box will now look like this:
This change affects dialog boxes of all parts, not only columns.
User-defined fields in templates This section explains how to use user-defined attributes with Template Editor version 2.2. For more information on how to use user-defined attributes in Template Editor version 3.3, see User-defined attributes in templates. If you change the name of a user-defined field, or create a new user-defined field, you need to modify the legend_text.fields located in the ..nt\bin\ folder, before you can select the field from a list in the Template Editor. You can also use user-defined fields without modifying the legend_text.fields, if you just type the field name correctly. For the example shown in Changing user-defined fields (p. 78), change legend_text.fields as follows: Example
TITLE3 MY_INFO_1 USER_FIELD_2 USER_FIELD_3 USER_FIELD_4
CHARACTER CHARACTER CHARACTER CHARACTER CHARACTER
LEFT LEFT LEFT LEFT LEFT
40 40 40 40 40
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Files and Folders
79
Effect on numbering You can set whether the user-defined attribute affects numbering or not. See General numbering settings. This is useful when you have members that are identical in all respects, apart from their user-defined attributes. Consider attribute
If you want Tekla Structures to consider the user-defined attribute when numbering, use the option yes in objects.inp, see Interpreting objects.inp (p. 80). In this case, Tekla Structures assigns different marks to parts that are identical, but have different user-defined attributes. You must also change the entry for the field in the Part attributes section of the objects.inp file for the user-defined value to be considered when numbering.
Ignore attribute
If you want Tekla Structures to ignore the user-defined attribute when numbering, use the option no in objects.inp. In this case, Tekla Structures assigns the same mark to parts that are identical, but have different user-defined attributes.
Only user-defined attributes of parts affect numbering. User-defined attributes of other objects, such as phases, projects, drawings, etc. do not affect numbering.
Interpreting objects.inp The main components of objects.inp are shown below. See also Fields in objects.inp (p. 81).
attribute or unique_attibute Attribute name Prompt Affects numbering Default value Type of values
Make sure Tekla Structures does not already use the attribute name you use. Consider using a prefix that ensures the name is unique, for example, your initials, or an abbreviation of your company name. Do not use spaces or reserved characters in attribute names.
80
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Files and Folders
The text you enter in the prompt section of the attribute is exactly what Tekla Structures displays in dialog boxes. Some default attributes have prompts like j_comment, meaning that the prompt comes from the joints.ail message file. For more information, read Messages (p. 68). To include an attribute in a report or template, add the name of the attribute to your layout in the Template Editor. When you run a report or create a drawing, Tekla Structures displays the current value of the attribute.
Fields in objects.inp The objects.inp file contains the following field names:
Field
Description
attribute
Regular attribute, which is copied with other part properties.
unique_attribute
Non-copyable attribute. The value of the attribute is never copied to another part. For example part checking status attributes are usually non-copyable.
attribute_name
Attribute name, used to find the attribute value
label_text
Text Tekla Structures displays in the dialog box
value_type
integer, float for numbers string for text option for lists date for date with small calendar date_time_min for date and time [12:00]
with small calendar date_time_sec for date and time [12:00:00]
with small calendar field_format
Definition of the field format in the dialog box. Uses C program terminology:
• •
"%s" for strings "%d" for numbers
consider_in_number ing
See Effect on numbering (p. 80)
check_switch
none, check_max, check_min, check_maxmin
attribute_value_ma x
The maximum possible value for the attribute
attribute_value_mi n
The maximum possible value for the attribute
Customizing message files You can customize message files in Tekla Structures.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Files and Folders
81
Example
The message file by_number.ail contains both prompts and default text (or text strings) that Tekla Structures uses in drawings. If you want to change the text Tekla Structures uses for near side plates from N/S to NS, do the following: 1. 2.
Open by_number.ail using a standard text editor. Change the N/S into NS in the following section: string by_number_msg_no_675 { ... entry = ("enu", "(N/S)"); };
3.
Save by_number.ail.
See below for an extract of the by_number.ail file:
by_number.ail string by_number_msg_no_675 { entry = ("chs", "(NS)"); entry = ("csy", "(N/S)"); entry = ("deu", "(vorn)"); entry = ("esp", "(L/C)"); entry = ("fra", "(AV)"); entry = ("cht", "(N/S)"); entry = ("hun", "(N/S)"); entry = ("ita", "(N/S)"); entry = ("jpn", "N/S"); entry = ("nld", "(VZ)"); entry = ("plk", "(N/S)"); entry = ("ptb", "(L/L)"); entry = ("ptg", "(L/L)"); entry = ("rus", "(N/S)"); entry = ("enu", "(N/S)"); }; string by_number_msg_no_676 entry = ("chs", "(FS)"); entry = ("cht", "(F/S)"); entry = ("csy", "(F/S)"); entry = ("deu", "(hinten)"); entry = ("esp", "(L/L)"); entry = ("fra", "(AR)"); entry = ("hun", "(F/S)"); entry = ("ita", "(F/S)"); entry = ("jpn", "F/S"); entry = ("nld", "(AZ)"); entry = ("plk", "(F/S)"); entry = ("ptb", "(L/P)"); entry = ("ptg", "(L/P)");
82
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Files and Folders
{
by_number.ail entry = ("rus", "(F/S)"); entry = ("enu", "(F/S)");};
Customizing parametric profiles The file profitab.inp defines the names that you can use for parametric profiles in Tekla Structures. You can customize this file to add more parametric profile names. See also The profile catalog (p. 97). Example
You want to use parametric plate profiles with a different name, PLTE. 1. 2.
Open the profitab.inp file in a standard text editor. Add the line: PLTE !
3.
! PL
! +2 !
!
1 !
2 !
!
Save profitab.inp to the current model folder and close the file.
See also Project and firm folders (p. 75).
Interpreting profitab.inp The first block in this file is the column titles. It also contains an explanation of possible values.
Title
Description
Prefix
Prefix Tekla Structures uses for the parametric profile. See also Parametric profiles.
Type
The parametric profile type, e.g. I profile.
SO
Sort order. The available options are:
• • • • •
-1: Decreasing sorting order +1: Increasing sorting order 0: No sorting order 2: Name increasing, value decreasing -2: Name decreasing, value increasing
For example, if your input is PLT200*10 or PLT10*200 and you select 2, the result in the output (such as a report) for both cases is PLT200*10. If you select -2, the result for both cases is PLT10*200. Z
Unit of measure used when inputting data
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Files and Folders
83
Title
Description
MI
Minimum number of parameters you can use in the Select profile dialog box. For example, a rectangular hollow section has sub-types: h*t, h*b*t, h1*b1-h2*b2*t. You define SHS with a minimum of two and a maximum of two parameters. When you use the Prefix option in the Select profile dialog box, you will only have the option h*t. Using the same example, SHS300*200*5 will not be available either.
MA
Maximum number of parameters you can use in the Select profile dialog box. See MI above for example.
G3-NAME
Only used for user-defined parametric profiles. Used by Tekla Structures to find the generation component.
Z3-NAME
Only used for user-defined parametric profiles. Identifies the modeling tool name.
Save defaults You may find it useful to create a set of standard files for a new project, or to set up Tekla Structures to suit the way you work. You can copy these standard files to the project or firm folders for future use. See Project and firm folders (p. 75). Many dialog boxes Tekla Structures displays when you are modeling contain properties for objects (beams, columns, modeling tools, etc.). Typically they have a Standard option in the Load list box. By default Tekla Structures uses the settings in the Standard file when applying commands. Use Tools > Defaults > Save Defaults to save a set of Standard files in the current model folder. Tekla Structures creates the following files:
File
Dialog box
standard.asv
Autosave properties
standard.clm
Column properties
standard.cpl
Contour plate properties
standard.crs
Beam/orthogonal beam properties
standard.dia
Twin profile properties
standard.fms
Plotting frames
standard.fpl
Folded plate
standard.ler
Layer properties
standard.mvi
Model view properties
standard.num
Setup - Numbering
standard.prf
Project properties Numbering and coefficient information from the Options dialog box.
84
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Files and Folders
File
Dialog box
standard.prt
Beam properties
standard.scr
Bolt properties
standard.stp
Setup - Preferences
standard.wld
Weld properties
Creating standard files You can also create standard files not listed above. Simply change the properties of a file, then save it as standard (use lower case). Tekla Structures saves standard files to the current model folder. See System folder (p. 75) for more on using standard files. See also Project and firm folders (p. 75).
Customizing other files Tekla Structures also stores a number of files, all of which contain object properties, in the current model folder. Tekla Structures creates these files when you click Save or Save as in dialog boxes. Example
You change the standard column properties to create a new type of column you call custom1. When you click Save as, Tekla Structures creates the file custom1.clm in the current model folder.
See File extensions (p. 259) for a full list of files Tekla Structures creates in this way.
Creating AutoDrawings wizard files You can create your own AutoDrawings wizard files using any standard text editor. Use the existing wizard files as examples to construct your own. A typical AutoDrawings wizard file includes several sets of drawing requests containing drawing, attribute and part settings to apply to selected objects, as well as a selection filter. The order of sets is important, as Tekla Structures only creates one drawing for each object. Example
The AutoDrawings wizard file creates an assembly drawing for an object that fulfills the selection filter criteria in one set. Tekla Structures will not create another assembly drawing for that object, even if it matches the criteria of the selection filter in later sets in the same wizard file.
Interpreting a wizard file
Wizard files consist of the following entries. Note the use of parentheses. set_drawing_type(assembly)
This line defines the type of drawing the wizard creates. The drawing type appears in parentheses. The options are:
Option
Creates
single
workshop drawings
assembly
assembly drawings
multi_single
workshop multi-drawings
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Files and Folders
85
Option
Creates
multi_single_with_layout
workshop multi-drawings with layout
multi_assembly
assembly multi-drawings
multi_assembly_with_layout
assembly multi-drawings with layout
cast_unit
cast-unit drawings
set_drawing_attributes(column)
This line tells Tekla Structures which drawing properties to use when creating the drawings. The name of the saved drawing properties appears in parentheses. set_filter(column_filter)
This line tells Tekla Structures which selection filter to use to select the parts from which to create drawings. The filter name appears in parentheses. See also Creating a selection filter. create_drawings()
Tekla Structures starts creating the drawings. This line should always appear immediately after the lines set_drawing_type, set_drawing_attributes and set_filter. Wizard file location
Place the newly created drawing wizard files in the attributes sub-folder in the model folder.
The wizards files that you create manually are also displayed in the Master Drawing Catalog. You cannot create new wizard files in the Master Drawing Catalog by editing the files in a text editor, but you can create them using the rule sets. See also
Using AutoDrawings to create drawings AutoDrawings Wizard log (p. 93) Adding a rule set to Master Drawing Catalog
Unfolding parameters The unfolding parameters define the location of the neutral axis when a profile is unfolded. The neutral axis is a line which runs along the length of a profile where stress and strain are equal to zero. Tekla Structures uses these parameters to create NC files and to display unfolded profiles in single-part drawings. Set these parameters in the conversion file, unfold_corner_ratios.inp, located in the system folder. Here is an example of a simple conversion file: 1 HE300A S235JR 0 180 1 0 90 .7 1 HE300A S235JR 0 180 2 0 1000 .7 2 PL* S235JR 0 200 1 0 90 .6
The parameters must be in a certain order in the conversion file: 1.
Type
• • •
86
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Files and Folders
1 is for polybeams 2 is for plates modelled as polybeams (profile e.g. PLT) 3 is for parts which are not unfolded and folllow the old polybeam calculation (for example the line 3 L* * disables unfolding of L profiles)
2. 3. 4.
5.
6.
Profile (you can use wildcards, too) Material (you can use wildcards, too) Rotation/thickness min
•
for polybeams: the minimum angle when the profile is rotated around its longitudinal axis
•
for plates: the minimum thickness of plate
Rotation/thickness max
•
for polybeams: the maximum angle when the profile is rotated around its longitudinal axis
•
for plates: the maximum thickness of plate
Flag
• • 7.
the minimum angle of sharp folds the minimum radius of curved bends
Angle/radius max
• • 9.
2 is for curved bends
Angle/radius min
• • 8.
1 is for sharp folds
the maximum angle of sharp folds the maximum radius of curved bends
Ratio
•
defines how much the profile stretches or shrinks when unfolded. Ratio = (1 - the relative location of the neutral axis). If only the inner surface of the profile shrinks, the ratio is 1. If only the outer surface of the profile stretches, the ratio is 0. By default, the ratio is 0.5 for length calculation and 0.0 for bending radius calculation.
Tekla Structures applies the unfolding ratio if the profile properties are within the range indicated by the minimum and maximum values.
To define the rotation angle, set the work plane by the first three points of the polybeam. Set the rotation angle in the Rotation field in the Beam properties dialog box.
Using flat bars When you have completed the model, you can have Tekla Structures show plates as the equivalent flat bars for manufacturing. Tekla Structures displays the plates as flat bars in reports and drawings. To show plates as flat bars: 1. 2.
Set the variable XS_USE_FLAT_DESIGNATION=TRUE. Indicate the prefix you want to use for flat bars using the variable XS_FLAT_PREFIX. For example, set XS_FLAT_PREFIX=FLAT.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Files and Folders
87
To prevent Tekla Structures displaying the profile in metric units in the US Imperial version, add the flat bar prefix to the profitab.inp file as a parametric profile.
3. 4.
Define materials, thickness, and width of available flat bars in the fltprops.inp file. See Defining flat bar sizes with fltprops.inp (p. 88). By default, Tekla Structures only compares plate width with the available flat bar dimensions.
• •
To include plate length, set the variable XS_CHECK_FLAT_LENGTH_ALSO=TRUE.
•
To define the tolerance between the actual and standard stiffener width, set the variable XS_STANDARD_STIFFENER_WIDTH_TOLERANCE.
To define the tolerance between the actual and standard gusset width, set the variable XS_STANDARD_GUSSET_WIDTH_TOLERANCE.
Defining flat bar sizes with fltprops.inp Use the fltprops.inp file to define flat bar length, width, and material. The file is located in the ..\environments\your_environment\profil folder. You can open it using any standard text editor. You can also copy it to model, project, or firm folders. If Tekla Structures cannot find the fltprops.inp file, it searches for the file fltprops (without .inp extension). See also Folder search order (p. 73). The first row in the file contains flat bar material definitions (enclosed in quotes " ") followed by plate thicknesses. If you do not define a material, you can use all materials for all flat bars. The following rows define the widths of available flat bars. Units are millimeters. fltprops.inp 5,6,"S235",8,10,"S275J0",10,15 40,45 50,55 60,65 70,75 100,110 200,220
Using the fltprops.inp file above, Tekla Structures displays the following plates as flat bars:
Connections
Plate
Material
5x40, 5x45, 6x50, 6x55
All materials
8x60, 8x65, 10x70, 10x75
S235
10x100, 10x110, 15x200, 15x220
S275J0
Some connections use the fltprops.inp file to convert plates to flat bars after creating the connection: 40, 41, 42, 47, 71, 78, 101, 102, 105, 106, 111, 123, 130, 132, 161, 162, 163, 164.
Settings
The following variables affect flat bar lists:
•
88
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Files and Folders
XS_USE_FLAT_DESIGNATION
• • • • •
XS_FLAT_PREFIX XS_CHECK_FLAT_LENGTH_ALSO XS_FLAT_TOLERANCE XS_FLAT_THICKNESS_TOLERANCE XS_USE_NEW_PLATE_DESIGNATION.
Using market sizes Market size is used in custom components to select a suitable plate dimension (usually plate thickness) from the available market sizes. For example, a plate’s thickness should match the web of a beam. To use market sizes, you must define a custom component using a custom component editor. 1. 2.
In the Variables dialog box, add the function =fMarketSize(material, thickness, extrastep) for a parameter. Define the available material sizes in the marketsize.dat file. See Defining market sizes with marketsize.dat (p. 89) for instructions.
Defining market sizes with marketsize.dat Use the marketsize.dat file to define available thicknesses (or any other dimension) for each material grade. The file is located in the ..\environments\your_environment\profil folder. You can open it using any standard text editor. A material grade element must begin each row followed by a comma-separated list of available plate thicknesses. These units are described in millimeters. marketsize.dat S235JR,6,9,12,16,19,22 SS400,1.6,2.3,3.2,4.5,6,9,12,16,19,22,25,28,32,38 DEFAULT,6,9,12,16,19,22,25,28,32,38
Example If the following row is in the marketsizes.dat file: S235JR,6,9,12,16,19,22 then the available market size plate thicknesses for S235JR plates are 6, 9, 12, 16 and 22 mm. So the function =fMarketSize("S235JR",10,0) would return 12, and =fMarketSize("S235JR",10,1) would return 16 (one size up). You can also use the function without entering any size up: =fMarketSize("SS400",7) which is the equivalent of =fMarketSize("SS400",7,0)
3.5 Log files Tekla Structures writes information to log files when you perform operations such as numbering or saving a model. This section describes these log files and how to interpret them.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Files and Folders
89
All log files are located in the current model folder.
Topics
Tekla Structures log files (p. 90) Viewing log files (p. 93) Direct access to parts from log files (p. 93)
Tekla Structures log files This section contains information on the following log files in Tekla Structures.
File
Description
check_database.l og
Tekla Structures writes information to this log file when you use the Correct database command. If inconsistencies are found in a part, the part id is written in this log. You can then access the part using the technique described in Direct access to parts from log files (p. 93).
conflict.log
This file lists write conflicts. You can view this file automatically. A write conflict occurs in multi-user mode when more than one user changes an object.
drawing_cloning. log
History of cloning drawings.
drawing_history. log
History of drawing creation. See Drawing history log (p. 92) for more information.
dstv_nc.log
Tekla Structures writes information to this file about the assemblies processed each time you create NC files. If you use the NC file classifier, this log file contains additional information on the process, e.g. which machine you used, etc. Also contains error messages.
90
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Files and Folders
filetranerror.lo g
Only used for cold rolled components, e.g. Albion, Ayrshire, Hispan etc. Tekla Structures writes error messages to this file if transfer macros fail.
numbering.histor y
This file has full details of each time numbering was carried out on the model. See Numbering history log (p. 91) for more information.
save_history.log
Tekla Structures writes information to this file each time you save a model.
wizard.log
Tekla Structures writes a log file when you run a wizard. See AutoDrawings Wizard log (p. 93) for more information.
File
Description
TeklaStructures. log
Contains information on the entire Tekla Structures session (from opening the model to closing it), e.g. errors, which catalogs you are using, etc.
analysis.log
Tekla Structures writes information to this file when you run the analysis. Analysis log file contains also information on errors that occur during load distribution.
Numbering history log Tekla Structures stores a full numbering history in the file numbering.history. The file has full details of each time numbering was carried out on the model. Tekla Structures places each session in a different block.
Interpreting numbering.history The header line of each block contains details of the user who carried out the numbering and the date. *** Numbering (kke): Tue Jun 27 10:38:03 2000
The next lines contain details of the numbering settings used: Full numbering Compare modified to old parts Compare new to old parts Tolerance: 1.000000
Then a list of defined series, prior to numbering. In this example, the first line means that in the series PL/1 the highest part position number is 1 and the highest assembly postion number is 0. PL/1 B/1 A/1 P/1 /1001
Max Max Max Max Max
Part Part Part Part Part
1 1 0 12 2
Max Max Max Max Max
Assembly Assembly Assembly Assembly Assembly
0 0 14 0 0
If both the part and assembly numbers here are not zero and you have set the variable XS_USE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBER_FOR to MAIN_PART, there may have been a conflict during numbering.
Tekla Structures then lists information on the parts and assemblies numbered.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Files and Folders
91
Column headings appear in this example, they do not appear in the file itself. Part/ assembly Part Part Part Part Part Part Part Part Part Part Part Part Part Part
Numbering Position number ID series Old New 124228 series:P/1 P/9 -> P/13 1541381 series:/2001 /0 -> /2001 1541698 series:/2001 /0 -> /2002 1541760 series:/1001 /0 -> /1005 1541820 series:/1001 /0 -> /1006 1541879 series:/1001 /0 -> /1004 1541941 series:/1001 /0 -> /1006 1542095 series:/1001 /0 -> /1007 1542129 series:/1001 /0 -> /1003 1542142 series:/1001 /0 -> /1003 1542153 series:/1001 /0 -> /1003 1542164 series:/1001 /0 -> /1003 1542175 series:/1001 /0 -> /1003 1542186 series:/1001 /0 -> /1003
Tekla Structures then shows an updated list of the defined series.
Assembly
/2001 Max Part 2 Max Assembly PL/1 Max Part 1 Max Assembly B/1 Max Part 1 Max Assembly A/1 Max Part 0 Max Assembly P/1 Max Part 13 Max Assembly /1001 Max Part 7 Max Assembly 124236 series:A/1 A/11 -> A/15
0 0 0 14 0 0
The final line of the block shows the end of the numbering session. *** Operation finished Tue Jun 27 10:38:03 2000 Full numbering
If you remove or delete the file numbering.history, Tekla Structures generates a new file with the same name when you next run numbering. The new file does not contain a history of previous numbering sessions.
Overlapping part/assembly series Tekla Structures records the error message shown in the following example in the numbering.log when you do not have enough free numbers in the numbering series. Example
Assembly numbering series overlap: Position number 1 in series 0 overlaps with position number 1 in series 1.
See also General numbering settings.
Drawing history log Use the variable XS_DRAWING_HISTORY_LOG_TYPE in the Drawing properties category in the Advanced options dialog box, to define what information Tekla Structures writes in the numbering history log file. You can use all, or any combination of, these options:
• • •
NEW DELETED MODIFIED
Separate the options using the _ character, for example, XS_DRAWING_HISTORY_LOG_TYPE=NEW_DELETED.
92
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Files and Folders
AutoDrawings Wizard log Tekla Structures writes a log file when you run an AutoDrawings wizard. The log file contains information about errors, number of drawings created, commands used etc. You can configure whether or not Tekla Structures creates a log file and how it is displayed using the Advanced tab in the AutoDrawings dialog box. Create log options:
•
No
Tekla Structures does not create a log file.
•
Create
Tekla Structures creates a new log file and deletes the old one.
•
Append
Tekla Structures adds a new entry to the existing log file. Display log options:
•
No
Tekla Structures does not display the log,
•
With associated viewer
Tekla Structures displays the log file in an associated viewer (e.g. Notepad) when you run the wizard. You can edit the log file.
•
On dialog
Tekla Structures displays the log file in a dialog box when you run the wizard. You can not edit the log file.
Viewing log files You can configure how Tekla Structures displays log files. Check Tools > Display Log File > With Associated Viewer to show log files in a viewer associated with the file type, e.g. Notepad. Use Tools > Display log file to view the following log files in a dialog box:
• • • • • •
Tekla Structures log Numbering history log Drawing history log Model history log (save_history.log) Clash check history log Analysis history log
You can also display log files on a toolbar at the bottom of the Tekla Structures window by checking Tools > Toolbars > Message Panel.
Direct access to parts from log files There is a direct link from Tekla Structures log files to the model, so you do not have to search for parts mentioned in the log file.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Files and Folders
93
To view parts in log file entries: 1. 2.
Click the line in the log file which contains the part. Parts have the prefix ’id’. Tekla Structures highlights the part in the model view.
If multiple part ids or an assembly appear on one line in the log file, Tekla Structures highlights all the parts. You can also select parts on different lines of the log file simultaneously.
Access part pop-up menu You can also access the pop-up menu of a part straight from the log file: Right-click the part id in the log file. Tekla Structures displays the same pop-up menu that you see when you right click a part in the modeling view.
94
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Files and Folders
4
Introduction
Catalogs
Catalogs are databases containing the information you would normally expect to find listed in design code tables, or printed reference material. For example, the bolt catalog contains a library of standard bolts and bolt assemblies used in structural steelwork. Catalogs can also contain project- or company-specific information. Catalogs are available for many environments, with region-specific elements.
In this chapter
This chapter explains how to view and modify catalogs. You will also learn how to add userdefined information to existing catalogs. The final section includes some information on advanced techniques that may be of interest to experienced users.
Contents
This chapter is divided into the following sections:
• • • • • • How to use this chapter
Things you should know (p. 95) The profile catalog (p. 97) The material catalog (p. 111) The bolt and bolt assembly catalogs (p. 115) The reinforcing bar catalog (p. 122) For the advanced user (p. 123)
You will find it useful to read Things you should know (p. 95) before moving on to subsequent sections.
4.1 Things you should know This section describes features and processes that are common to all the catalogs. You should read this section before moving on to modifying the catalogs. Topics
Open a model first (p. 96) The filter (p. 96) Saving a modified catalog (p. 96) What is the difference between Update and OK? (p. 97)
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Catalogs
95
Open a model first You must open a model to view or modify the catalogs, as this action opens the related catalogs. Which catalog is used?
Several catalogs of each type (profile, material, bolt, etc.) can be stored simultaneously in different locations, so it is important to know which catalog you are using. When you open a model, Tekla Structures searches for the catalog files in a specific order, until they are found.
• • • •
current model folder project folder firm folder profile folder
The physical location of the project, firm and profile folders are defined in the initialization file by the variables shown in the illustration below. XS_PROFDB only applies to the profile catalog. XS_SYSTEM applies to all other catalogs.
The filter The filter option appears in all the modify catalog dialog boxes.
Use it to specify which entries from a catalog should appear in the tree. The default filter string is the wildcard symbol (*). This displays all items in the catalog. Using filter strings
To display all parts with names beginning with A, enter A* in the Filter field. To display all parts with names containing 100, enter *100*. Tekla Structures only shows the elements that satisfy your criteria. See Filtering objectsin the Modeling manual for more on filtering.
Saving a modified catalog This information only relates to profile and material catalogs. To save changes to a catalog:
96
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Catalogs
1. 2. 3.
Click OK to exit the Modify catalog dialog box. Click OK in the Save confirmation dialog box to save the changed catalog to the current model folder. Click Cancel to return to the Modify catalog dialog box. To exit without saving changes, click Cancel in the Modify catalog dialog box.
What is the difference between Update and OK? This information only relates to the profile and material catalogs. Summary
This table lists the various save and exit functions, together with a brief explanation of what each one does.
Button
Action Saves changes to the catalog in memory until you click OK. Saves changes to the catalog on the hard disk. Used to exit without saving changes. Not currently available in the bolt or plotter catalogs.
How it works
When you first open a model, Tekla Structures reads information from the relevant catalogs on the hard disk and stores it in the computer’s memory. When you select a material or profile Tekla Structures reads the data from the catalog in memory and displays it in the dialog box. This is a much faster method than accessing the catalog stored on the hard disk. When you change data in the dialog box, the changes appear immediately, but the information is not saved to the catalog in memory until you click Update. Tekla Structures only saves the modified catalog to the hard disk when you click OK to exit the Modify catalog dialog box and click OK in the save confirmation dialog box.
4.2 The profile catalog Introduction
Tekla Structures stores the analysis and design properties of standard and user-defined profiles in the profile catalog. Standard profiles are ones which can be obtained premanufactured. You can also create user-defined profiles from user-defined cross sections. Parametric profiles have a predefined, hard-coded shape, with one or more parameters to define the size of the profile. Tekla Structures calculates the cross-section shape each time you open the model. You can create parametric profile names and enter dimensions for them. See also Parametric profiles, in the Modeling Manual. To view or modify profiles, click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to display the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box. Tekla Structures displays profiles in a tree structure. Profiles are grouped according to rules such as profile type (e.g. I profiles) and profile sub-type (e.g. HEA).
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Catalogs
97
Different icons denote profile types, rules and profiles within the tree:
Icon
Used to show Profile type rule. Different icons show different types. Rule Individual standard profile Individual parametric profile
Pop-up menus allow you to modify the tree. Before you start
Read Things you should know (p. 95).
Topics
Working with rules (p. 98) Viewing or modifying the profile catalog (p. 102) Adding a profile (p. 103) Creating a cross section (p. 103) Modifying a cross section (p. 105) Deleting a cross section (p. 105) Adding a standard (fixed) user-defined profile (p. 106) Adding user-defined attributes to a profile (p. 107) Merging profile catalogs (p. 108) Exporting the profile catalog (p. 109) Exporting elements from the profile catalog (p. 109) Importing from previous versions (p. 109) Importing the profile catalog (p. 110)
Working with rules What is a rule?
98
A rule filters the information in the catalog according to criteria set in the rule filter. For more information on how the filter works, read The filter (p. 96). For example, in the Modify profile catalog dialog box, profiles are grouped according to profile type (e.g. I profiles) and profile sub-type (e.g. HEA) using rules.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Catalogs
To change how entries in the profile catalog are grouped, you will need to modify the rules in the profile catalog. Read Adding a rule (p. 101).
Defining the material of profiles Use the Modify profile catalog dialog box to associate profile types with certain material. You can define which profiles are available for steel parts, concrete parts, or both. This affects which profile types are shown in the Select profile dialog box. For example, if you create a steel part and click the Select... button next to the Profile field in the part properties dialog box, certain profile types will appear:
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Catalogs
99
To define the material of a profile type: 1. 2. 3.
Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to modify the profile catalog. In the Modify profile catalog dialog box, select the profile type, for example L profiles. To associate the L profiles with steel, right-click and select Material > Steel from the popup menu. A check mark next to Steel on the pop-up menu indicates that L profiles are available for steel parts.
4.
To make the L profiles available also for concrete parts, right-click again and select Material > Concrete.
100
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Catalogs
5. 6. 7.
To remove a check mark, select the profile type, right-click, and select Material and the option you want to make unavailable. Click OK to close the Modify profile catalog dialog box. Click OK in the Save confirmation dialog box to save the changes to the profile catalog.
Adding a rule To add a rule to the tree: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog...to display the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box. Right-click any existing rule, click Add rule to display the Profile manager rules dialog box. Type in the Rule name. Choose the Profile type to which the rule will be applied. Enter the Name filter string that will define the new rule. As a default the wildcard symbol (*) is entered, meaning “all entries”. To group all catalog entries with names beginning with A, enter A* as the Name filter string. To group all catalog entries with names containing 100, enter *100*. Tekla Structures groups the catalog entries that satisfy your criteria under a new rule.
For more information on filtering, see Wildcards.
Adding a next level rule A next level rule creates a subgroup under an existing rule. Follow the instructions for Adding a rule (p. 101), but use the option Add next level rule.
Editing a rule To edit a rule: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog...to display the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box. Right-click any existing rule, click Edit a rule to display the Profile manager rules dialog box. Modify the rule as required. Read Adding a rule (p. 101) for more on rules. Click OK to return to the Modify profile catalog dialog box.
Organizing rules Tekla Structures lists profiles in alphabetical order, and rules in the order which you can specify. To change the order in which rules appear: 1. 2.
Click File > Catalog > Profiles > Modify... to display the Modify profile catalog dialog box. Right-click the rule and use the Move Up/Move Down options.
Deleting a rule To delete a rule from the tree: 1.
Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog...to display the Modify profile catalog dialog box.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Catalogs
101
2. See also
Right-click any existing rule, click Delete a rule. The rule is deleted and you are returned to the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box.
Exporting elements from the profile catalog (p. 109)
Viewing or modifying the profile catalog To view or modify the profile catalog: 1. 2.
Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to display the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box. Click an existing profile to view or modify it.
Information on profiles is separated into three tabs: General tab
The General tab has information on profile types and dimensions.
Analysis tab
The Analysis tab has information on the properties used in structural analysis. The structure is analyzed using the Finite Element Method.
User attributes tab
The User attributes tab is for viewing or entering user-defined attributes for profiles. Read A closer look at the export file (p. 123) for more information.
Using standardized values for profile dimensions You can define standardized values for the dimensions of parametric profiles in the industry_standard_profiles.inp file in the ..\environments\*your_environment*\system folder. To use these values, in the Select profile dialog box, select a parametric profile for which you have defined standardized values and select the Use industry standardized values only checkbox. You can select the profile dimensions from a list box in the Value column. You can edit the industry_standard_profiles.inp file using any standard text editor (for example, Notepad). Use the following format:
• • • • Example
Profile and profile subtype Parameters separated by spaces Units for each parameter Standardized values for each parameter (own row for each dimension combination)
In the following example we define standardized combinations of dimension values for a C profile:
industry_standard_profiles.inp C h*b*t h b mm mm 75 35 75 35 75 35 100 40 100 40 100 40
102
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Catalogs
t mm 5 6 7 7 8 9
Adding a profile There are two ways to create a new profile:
• •
Copy an existing profile. Create a new profile from scratch.
Copy an existing profile The simplest way to create a new profile is by modifying a copy of an existing, similar one, as in the following example.
Choose profile type and profile dimensions so that they match the new cross section as closely as possible. The profile type and profile dimensions (height, width, etc.) affect the connections applied, so a bad profile type, or missing values, may result in problems with connections. Remember that some connections only work for certain types of profiles. Always enter values for h and b, as these values can affect how Tekla Structures display profiles. Steps
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to display the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box. Find a profile similar to the one you want to create and right-click. A similar profile might be one with the same profile type and subtype as the one you want to create. Click Copy profile. Change the profile name. Modify the profile properties. Click Update and then OK to save your profile. Click OK in the save confirmation dialog box to save the changes to the catalog.
Creating a new standard profile Alternatively you can create a new profile. Steps
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
See also
Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to display the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box. Right-click anywhere in the tree structure and click Add profile. A new profile will be created with the name PROFILE (number). Change the profile name. The profile name must be in upper case, with no spaces. Tekla Structures will automatically convert lower case text to upper case in this field. Choose a profile type and profile subtype, then enter the profile properties. Click Update and then OK to save your profile. Click OK in the save confirmation dialog box to save the changes to the catalog.
Adding a standard (fixed) user-defined profile (p. 106)
Creating a cross section Employ user-defined cross sections to create user-defined profiles.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Catalogs
103
Cross-section data is now stored in the profdb.bin, not the profcs.bin, as in previous versions.
Cross section with no inner contours To create a cross section with no inner contours: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Click Modeling > Profiles > Define Crosss Section Using Polygon. Pick the corners of the cross section. Pick the starting point to close the current polygon. Pick the center point of the cross section. This will serve as the center-line point when used in a profile with user-defined cross sections. Name the cross section in the User profile cross section dialog box, which opens automatically after the center point is picked. Click OK to save the cross section. Click OK to save the changes to the catalog.
Cross section with inner contours To create a cross section with inner contours: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Click Modeling > Profiles > Define Cross Section Using Polygon. Pick the corners of the cross section. Pick the starting point to close the current polygon. Pick the corners of the cross-section inner contour. Pick the starting point to close the current polygon. Repeat until all inner contours are picked. Click the middle mouse button. Pick the center point of the cross section. This will serve as the center-line point when used in a profile with user-defined cross sections. Name the cross section in the User profile cross section dialog box, which opens automatically after the center point is picked. Click OK to save the cross section. Click OK to save the changes to the catalog.
When creating multi-cross-section profiles, it is important to create cross sections with the same number of points, created in the same order.
Example
104
A pitched I profile needs two cross sections with the same center point height. You can create a pitched profile as illustrated below. The cross-section inner contour and outer contour can be picked either clockwise or counterclockwise.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Catalogs
See also
Modifying a cross section (p. 105) Deleting a cross section (p. 105)
Modifying a cross section To modify an existing cross section: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Click Modeling > Profiles > Edit Polygon Cross Sectionto display the Modify Cross Section dialog box. Click on the cross section you want to modify. Modify the cross section point data. Click Update and then OK to save the cross section and exit the dialog box. Click OK to save the changes to the catalog.
Different types of chamfer You can use different types of chamfer in user-defined profiles. Click Modeling > profiles > Edit Polygon Cross Section to open the Modify Cross Section dialog box. Number on the Point properties tab refers to each point picked when the cross section was created, in numerical order. The first point picked is Number 1, the second 2, etc. Click on the down arrow against Number to view or change the properties of each point.
Click on the cross section, then click the down arrow in Chamfer type to choose a chamfer type. The x and y values apply to the chamfer type. For example, for the chamfer to be equal on both sides of the angle, only enter a value for x, as in the illustration above. For an uneven chamfer, enter values for x and y.
Deleting a cross section To delete a cross section from the catalog: 1. 2. 3.
Click Modeling > Profiles > Edit Polygon Cross Section. Click a cross section. Click Delete.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Catalogs
105
4. 5.
Click OK to exit the Modify cross section dialog box. Click OK in the Save confirmation dialog box to save the changes to the catalog.
Adding a standard (fixed) user-defined profile Only user-defined cross sections are used to create user-defined profiles. Create the cross sections needed before adding a standard user-defined profile.
Read Creating a cross section (p. 103) for more on cross sections.
Single crosssection profile
To create a user-defined profile using a single cross section: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Multi-crosssection profile
Example
106
Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog.... Right-click an existing profile, click Add profile. Name the profile. The profile name must be in upper case, with no spaces. Tekla Structures will automatically convert lower case text to upper case. Click User-defined, fixed in the Profile type list box. Click the user-defined cross section to be used in the Profile subtype list box. Enter 1 for the Cross section number and 0.0000 for the Relative location. Click OK to save your profile. Click OK in the save confirmation dialog box to save the changes to the catalog.
To create a multi-cross-section profile: 1. 2. 3.
Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog.... Right-click an existing profile, click Add profile. Name the profile. The profile name must be in upper case, with no spaces. Tekla Structures will automatically convert lower case text to upper case. 4. Click User-defined, fixed in the Profile type list box. 5. Click the user-defined cross section to be used in the Profile subtype list box. 6. Enter the Cross section number and the Relative location, assigning a new number and location for each one. Relative location values indicate the location of the cross section along the axis: 0.0 for starting end and 1.0 for second end. 7. Use the Add button in the Modify profile catalog dialog box to create more cross sections. 8. Click Update after defining each cross section in the profile. 9. Click OK to save your profile. 10. Click OK in the save confirmation dialog box to save the changes to the catalog. In a pitched profile, Relative location values are 0.0, 0.5 and 1.0, for cross sections 1, 2 and 3.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Catalogs
Remember, cross sections affect the total weight of the profile.
Choose the profile type and dimensions so that they match the new cross section as closely as possible. Profile type and dimensions affect the connections applied, so the wrong profile type or missing values may result in problems with connections. Some connections only work for certain profiles. Always enter values for h and b as they affect how the profile is displayed.
The values h and b are used when calculating the height of a part in pixels. If the values are 0, the part is drawn as a line. These values are also used when setting the position of the part.
Adding user-defined attributes to a profile In addition to general and analysis properties, you can also create your own attributes for profiles. For instance, you might specify paint layer thickness, or the maximum grain size of concrete using a user-defined attribute. To create a user-defined attribute for a profile: 1. 2. 3.
Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to open the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box. Click Definitions... on the User attributes tab to open the Modify profile properties dialog box. Click Add to add a user-defined attribute. The dialog box will now look like this:
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Catalogs
107
4.
Click the text under each heading to define the attributes using the following fields:
Field
Comment
Profile type
Click the down arrow to indicate the profile types that the property will be applied to.
Quantity type
The type of information the user-defined attribute will contain, e.g. weight, area, ratio, string.
Order
The order in which user-defined attributes are shown in the dialog box. Smaller values are shown first.
Property name
This field is saved in the catalog and can be used in reports and templates. When this field is used in a template, PROFILE.PROPERTY_NAME indicates where the property name will appear. Example:PAINT_LAYER_THICKNESS
Symbol
An abbreviation that can be used for the property, such as Ix, ct, etc.
Label
The property name is translated to the label in various circumstances.
Merging profile catalogs The import and export options work together and are used to merge catalogs. It is a useful technique when:
See also
•
Upgrading to a new version of the program, when you want to retain customized catalogs from the previous version.
• •
Combining catalogs stored in different locations. Sharing information from catalogs with other users.
Exporting the profile catalog (p. 109) Exporting elements from the profile catalog (p. 109) Importing from previous versions (p. 109) Importing the profile catalog (p. 110)
108
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Catalogs
Exporting the profile catalog To export the entire profile catalog: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to display the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box. Click the Export button. Choose a location for the export file. Type in a name for the file. If you type in an existing filename, that file will be overwritten. Exported catalog files have the file extension lis.
Use this method to export the entire profile catalog. If you want to export only part of your catalog, read Exporting elements from the profile catalog (p. 109).
Exporting elements from the profile catalog You can also export a branch of the profile tree, i.e. all the profiles grouped under a rule, or a single profile. Branch
To export a branch of the profile tree: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Single profile
Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to display the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box. Right-click the branch to be exported. Click Export profiles. Choose a location for the export file. Type in a name for the file.
To export a single profile: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to display the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box. Right-click the profile to be exported. Click Export profile. Choose a location for the export file. Type in a name for the file. Exported catalog files have the file extension lis.
Read A closer look at the export file (p. 123) if you are interested in the contents of the export file. You should also read this section if you are considering editing the export file.
Importing from previous versions You cannot import export files created with previous versions of the program. However, profile catalogs from previous versions are automatically converted when a model is opened in the new version. So, to create a suitable export file, open the relevant model in the new version and export the catalog.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Catalogs
109
Do not save your model in the new version, or you will not be able to open it in the older version.
Importing the profile catalog To import a profile catalog: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Open a model which uses the profile catalog to which you wish to import. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to display the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box. Click Import. Indicate the location of the file to be imported. Exported catalog files have the file extension lis.
Read Exporting the profile catalog (p. 109) for information on how to create an export file.
What happens to existing profiles? If an existing profile has the same name as the one being imported, the program will give you three options:
Option
What happens
Replace
The current profile is deleted, the profile in the file being imported is added.
Merge
Profile properties that are different in the file being imported are added to the existing profile, all the other properties remain unchanged. Use this option to import only certain attributes of profiles.
Leave
The existing profile is not replaced and the definition in the import file is ignored.
The merge option is a very useful one if you want to import certain elements of the catalog. For example, you could use it to import only the user-defined attributes of a profile.
User-defined fixed cross section definitions Each cross section definition has a unique name and ID number. If, during an import, a cross section is found in the existing profile catalog which has the same name, but different properties, the cross section being imported is renamed (an incremental number is added to the end of the existing name). The new name is also written to the Tekla Structures log file.
110
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Catalogs
User-defined attributes If a user-defined attribute with a different definition already exists, you will be prompted to replace or leave the existing attribute.
4.3 The material catalog The material catalog contains information on material grades. Materials are displayed in a hierarchical tree, grouped according to material, e.g. steel and concrete. Topics
Viewing or modifying the material catalog (p. 111) Adding a user-defined attribute to a material grade (p. 112) Adding a material type (p. 113) Adding a new material grade (p. 113) Deleting a material grade (p. 113) Defining your own symbols for materials (p. 113) Export and import (p. 114)
Viewing or modifying the material catalog To view or modify the material catalog: 1. 2.
Click Modeling > Material Catalog to view the Modify material catalog dialog box. Click an existing material to view or modify its properties.
Information on materials is contained on four tabs in the Modify material catalog dialog box.
General tab
The General tab has fields for three alternative names (or aliases) for the material. These are usually the material names used in different countries or standards. It also contains the profile and plate density values.
Analysis tab
The Analysis tab has information on the properties used in structural analysis. The structure is analyzed using the Finite Element Method.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Catalogs
111
Design tab
The Design tab has information on design-specific properties such as strengths, partial safety factors, etc. Click the correct design code in the Design code list box:
User attributes tab
In addition to general and analysis properties, you can also create your own attributes for material grades. For instance, you might specify paint layer thickness, or the maximum grain size of concrete using a user-defined attribute.
Adding a user-defined attribute to a material grade To add a user-defined attribute to a material grade: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Click Modeling > Material Catalog... to open the Modify Material Catalog dialog box. Click Definitions on the User attributes tab to open the Modify profile properties dialog box. Click Add to add a user-defined attribute. Click the text under each heading and use the list box to define each attribute.
The following fields can be used:
Field
Comment
Category
The material category to which the user-defined attribute will be applied.
Design code
The design code it comes under.
Material type Quantity type
The type of information the user-defined attribute will contain, e.g. weight, area, ratio, string.
Order
The order in which user-defined attributes are shown in the dialog box. Smaller values are shown first.
Property name
This field is saved in the catalog and can be used in reports and templates. When this field is used in a template MATERIAL.PROPERTY_NAME indicates where the property name will appear.
Label
The property name is translated to the label in various circumstances.
Units of measure Set units of measure for both input and output using Tools > Options > Options... > Units and decimals.
112
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Catalogs
Adding a material type If the tree does not contain the material type you need, you can add material types. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Click Modeling > Material Catalog... to display the Modify Material Catalog dialog box. Click a material (e.g. steel) and right-click to access the pop-up menu. Click Add material. Enter the material properties in the Add material dialog box. Click OK to save the material grade and exit the Modify material catalog dialog box. Click OK in the save confirmation dialog box to save the changes to the catalog.
Adding a new material grade The simplest way to create a new material grade is by modifying a copy of an existing, similar one. Steps
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Click Modeling > Material Catalog...to display the Modify material catalog dialog box. Click a material grade similar to the one you wish to create, right-click. Click Copy grade. Change the Material name. Modify the material grade properties. Click OK to save the material grade and exit the Modify material catalog dialog box. Click OK in the save confirmation dialog box to save the changes to the catalog.
Alternatively you can create a new material. Steps
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Click Modeling > Material Catalog...to display the Modify material catalog dialog box. Click a material type (e.g. steel), right-click to access the pop-up menu. Click Add grade. Change the material grade name in the Selected grade field. Enter the material grade properties. Click OK to save the material grade and exit the Modify material catalog dialog box. Click OK in the save confirmation dialog box to save the changes to the catalog.
Deleting a material grade To delete a material grade from the catalog: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Click Modeling > Material Catalog... to display the Modify Material Catalog dialog box. Click a material, right-click to access the pop-up menu. Click Delete grade. Click OK to exit the Modify material catalog dialog box. Click OK in the save confirmation dialog box to save the changes to the catalog.
For more on saving the catalog, read Saving a modified catalog (p. 96).
Defining your own symbols for materials You can replace existing material definitions with your own, which will then be displayed in drawings.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Catalogs
113
Material definitions can contain text, numbers and symbols. Where are material definitions stored?
User-defined material definitions are stored in the file defined by the variable XS_MATERIAL_SYMBOL_REPRESENTATION_FILE. The suggested filename is material_symbol_table.txt. This file does not exist until you create it. Once this file is created and set for use in the Advanced options dialog box, Drawing properties category, using the variable XS_MATERIAL_SYMBOL_REPRESENTATION_FILE, all the named materials in the catalog will be replaced with the ones defined in this file. Each line of the file defines a material, using the syntax: Material_name
symbol_file.sym @ n
Syntax of the material file
Example
Value
Description
material_name
The name of the material used in the material catalog.
symbol_file
The file name of the symbol to be used. This must have the suffix .sym. There is an example of a user-defined symbol at the end of this section.
n
The symbol number. This number is also displayed in the Symbol Editor.
SM400A ud_mat.sym @ 13 A SM400B ud_mat.sym @ 13 B SM490 ud_mat.sym @ 11
When creating your own material definition file, ensure that materials with extended material names are listed before ones with similar, simpler names, or they will both be given the same symbol. For example, SM400B must be listed before SM400. This is an example of a user-defined symbol:
Export and import The export and import process is the same as for the profile catalog, which is described in Merging profile catalogs (p. 108).
114
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Catalogs
4.4 The bolt and bolt assembly catalogs Bolts are used in a model as predefined assemblies made up of components such as bolts, washers, nuts, etc. The bolt catalog contains bolt assembly elements, such as bolts of different size and length, nuts, washers, etc. The bolt assembly catalog contains bolt assemblies. When bolt assemblies are used in a model, the program automatically handles bolt length, number of washers, nuts, etc. Topics
Viewing or modifying the bolt catalog (p. 115) Saving a modified bolt catalog (p. 117) Viewing or modifying bolt assemblies (p. 117) Creating studs (p. 119) Merging bolt catalogs (p. 121) Exporting the bolt catalog (p. 121) Importing the bolt catalog (p. 121)
Viewing or modifying the bolt catalog To view individual bolt elements, such as bolts, washers, and nuts: Click Detailing > Bolts > Bolt Catalog... to access the Bolt Catalog dialog box. Filter
The Filter option is used to limit the list of entries from the catalog which are displayed. Read The filter (p. 96) for more on filtering techniques.
Layout
The Modify bolt catalog dialog box contains a list box. Single click an entry on the list to access its properties. The following table explains the terms used for the properties of bolts, washers and nuts, in the Bolt catalog dialog box.
Term
What does it mean?
When is this value used?
add. dist
Length of the part of the bolt that protrudes from the nut
Bolt length calculation
top thick
Thickness of bolt head
Drawing the bolt (e.g. to screen)
thread len
The length of the threaded part of the bolt shaft
This is not used in bolt length calculation (value is 0) if the bolt is fully-threaded.
washer tol
Tolerance between the washer inner diameter and the bolt diameter
When searching for the correctsized washer for the bolt. Not used in bolt length calculation.
span size
Size of the wrench needed
Drawing the bolt (e.g. to screen)
top diam
Diameter of the hexagon
For information only
calc thick
Calculation thickness of a nut or washer
Used in bolt length calculation
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Catalogs
115
Term
What does it mean?
When is this value used?
real thick
True thickness of a nut or washer
For information only
inner diam
Inner diameter of a nut or washer
For information only
outer diam
Outer diameter of a nut or washer
For information only
An example of the properties of a typical bolt:
An example of the properties of a typical nut:
An example of the properties of a typical washer:
116
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Catalogs
Saving a modified bolt catalog Click Update to save the changes in memory until OK is clicked. When you modify a catalog and click OK to exit a dialog box prompts for a choice between two options:
The first option saves the modified bolt catalog to the current model folder. The second acts like the Windows Cancel button and does not save the modified catalog.
Viewing or modifying bolt assemblies To view or modify bolt assemblies: Click Detailing > Bolts > Bolt Assembly Catalog... to access the Bolt Assembly Catalog dialog box. Click an entry on the list to access its properties.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Catalogs
117
The Bolt assembly catalog dialog box contains two fields for assembly names, Short name and Standard, which are used in different areas of the program.
Field
Description
When is this value used?
Short name
This name is used in marking and reports. It is usually the commercial name for a specific bolt.
Drawing the bolt (e.g. on the screen)
Standard
This is the full name and is show in the list box in the Bolt properties dialog box invoked from the Model Editor.
Bolt length calculation
The illustration below shows the possible components of the assembly. The program chooses the appropriate components when the assembly is used.
118
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Catalogs
Does value for additional length affect all or individual diameters? Enter additional length value here. Click here to specify whether the value is absolute or relative to diameter.
The value given for additional length can affect either individual or all diameters of one bolt assembly. See the illustration above. The value for length can either be absolute or relative to diameter. See the illustration above. Defining additional length for bolt calculation
Use the Add. dist... button to control how much of the bolt protrudes from the nut. It is useful for performing a quick update of the entire bolt catalog. This value is used in bolt length calculation.
Clicking Add. dist updates the Add. dist values of all bolts which use the selected bolt standard and have the selected diameter.
For more information, read Bolt length calculation (p. 126).
Creating studs A stud is special type of bolt that is welded to steel parts to transfer loads between steel and concrete.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Catalogs
119
To create and use studs: 1.
Click Detailing > Bolts > Bolt Catalog... and create a stud bolt in the bolt catalog. Enter the following properties:
Property
Value
Name
Name for the stud bolt.
Type
Standard
This name is needed when creating bolt assembly for the stud.
Diameter
Shank diameter.
Length
Stud length.
Weight
Stud weight.
top thick
Head thickness.
top diameter
Head diameter.
2.
Click Detailing > Bolts > Bolt Assembly Catalog... and create a stud bolt assembly.
Select the standard for the stud bolt. Set all the other assembly component to NONE.
3.
120
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Catalogs
To create studs in the model, create bolts and select the stud assembly standard. For more information seeCreating a single bolt.
Merging bolt catalogs The import and export options work together and are used to merge catalogs. It is a useful technique when:
•
Upgrading to a new version of the program, when you want to retain a customized bolt catalog from the previous version. Read Upgrading to a new version (p. 121) for a specific example of this.
• •
Combining bolt catalogs stored in different locations. Sharing information from the bolt catalog with other users.
The export and import method for the bolt catalog is different to that used for the profile and materials catalogs.
Exporting the bolt catalog To export the entire bolt catalog: 1. 2. 3.
Open the model containing the required bolt catalog. Click Detailing > Bolts > Export Bolt Catalog. Tekla Structures writes the bolt catalog to the file screwdb.lis in the current model folder.
This method exports the entire bolt catalog. To export only part of the bolt catalog, edit the export file to contain only the required elements.
Importing the bolt catalog To import the bolt catalog: 1. 2. 3.
4.
Open the model to which you want to import the bolt catalog. Copy the screwdb.lis file you want to import to the current model folder. Click Detailing > Bolts > Import Bolt Catalog to import the bolt catalog file screwdb.lis from the current model folder. Tekla Structures does not replace entries in the existing catalog that have the same names as the entries in the import file. Check the status bar for error messages. To view errors, check the Tekla Structures log by clicking Tools > Display Log File > Session History....
Upgrading to a new version Example
This is an example of how to use import and export when you upgrade to a new version of Tekla Structures. This technique ensures that you retain any customization made to your existing catalog and that only catalog additions from the new version are merged. Basically you will export the new catalog to your existing one. This prevents Tekla Structures overwriting existing catalog entries, or creating duplicates. The following steps explain how to do this when changing from one version of the program to another.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Catalogs
121
Do not simply copy and paste the bolt catalog from a previous version over the one in the new version. This will result in additions to the new version being lost.
1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6.
Open a model in the new version. Do not save the model, or you will not be able to use it in previous versions. Click Detailing > Bolts > Export Bolt Catalog. The program will create the export file screwdb.lis in the current model folder. Open the same model in the previous version. Click File > Catalog > Bolts > Import. The program imports from the file screwdb.lis in the current model folder. Existing entries with the same name as in the imported catalog are not replaced. The merged catalog is now available in the previous version. To use the merged catalog in the new version, first rename the screwdb.db file in the new version folder \environments\*your_environment*\profil\.
Rename the screwdb.db file in the new version, before replacing it with the screwdb.db file from the previous version.
7.
Copy the screwdb.db file (which contains the merged bolt catalog) from the previous version folder ..\environments\*your_environment*\profil\ to the new version folder ..\environments\*your_environment*\profil\.
The bolt assembly catalog cannot be exported and imported.
4.5 The reinforcing bar catalog The reinforcing bar catalog contains details of the reinforcement used in concrete structures. It includes both the standard bending radius and the standard hook dimensions. This section explains how to add, delete and modify entries in the reinforcing bar catalog.
Read Reinforcement in the Detailing Manual for information on how to create reinforcing bars in Tekla Structures. This chapter also contains a detailed explanation of reinforcing bar properties.
The catalog is stored in the file ..\environment\*your_environment*\profil\rebar_database.inp. To modify the catalog, edit this file using any standard text editor.
122
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Catalogs
4.6 For the advanced user The section provides addtional information on the following subjects. It is aimed at experienced Tekla Structures users. Topics
A closer look at the export file (p. 123) Do’s & don’ts of editing the export file (p. 124) Importing part of the bolt catalog (p. 124) Units used in export and import (p. 125) Bolt length calculation (p. 126)
A closer look at the export file This information only relates to the profile and material catalogs and provides additional information on the export file discussed in Exporting elements from the profile catalog (p. 109) and Export and import (p. 114). We will use a typical export file from the profile catalog as an example. Catalog export files have the file extension lis. Sections of the export file
The export file is divided into specific sections. The first line of the file will be (n is the version number): PROFILE CATALOG EXPORT VERSION = n
Do not delete this line. If it does not appear in the file, the import will be canceled.
The next section defines the hierarchical tree structure used to display the contents of the catalog. The next section contains the profiles. Standard profiles
Most profile types are hard-coded into the program and look like this in the export file (partial entry shown):
PROFILE_NAME = "HEA120"; { TYPE = 1; SUB_TYPE = 1001; COORDINATE = 0.000; "FLANGE_SLOPE_RATIO" "ROUNDING_RADIUS_2" "ROUNDING_RADIUS_1" "FLANGE_THICKNESS" "WEB_THICKNESS" "WIDTH" "HEIGHT" User-defined fixed profiles
0.000000000E+000 0.000000000E+000 1.200000000E+001 8.000000000E+000 5.000000000E+000 1.200000000E+002 1.140000000E+002
User-defined fixed profiles can have more than one cross section. They look like this in the export file:
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Catalogs
123
PROFILE_NAME = "TAN_HK_TEST_2_CS"; TYPE = 998; SUB_TYPE = 253; COORDINATE = 0.000; "EQUIVALENT_TYPE" 11 "FLANGE_SLOPE_RATIO" 0.000000000E+000 "ECCENTRICITY_Y" 0.000000000E+000 "ECCENTRICITY_X" 0.000000000E+000 "ROUNDING_RADIUS_2" 0.000000000E+000 "FLANGE_THICKNESS_2" 0.000000000E+000 "WEB_THICKNESS_2" 0.000000000E+000
The profile type for user-defined fixed profiles is 998. SUB_TYPE refers to the name of the cross section definition. When importing user-defined fixed profiles, the relevant cross section definitions must be in the same import file as the profile. The cross section definition appears like this in the import file:
CROSS_SECTION_NAME = "MY_OWN_PROFILE" POINT_NUMBER = 1; POINT_X = 200.00; POINT_Y = -200.00; CHAMFER_TYPE = 0; CHAMFER_X = 0.00; CHAMFER_Y = 0.00; POINT_NUMBER = 2; POINT_X = 200.00; POINT_Y = 200.00; CHAMFER_TYPE = 0; CHAMFER_X = 0.00; CHAMFER_Y = 0.00; User-defined parametric profiles
The geometry of user-defined parametric profiles is defined in the file ..\environments\common\inp\sections.clb. A user-defined parametric profile can only be imported if it is defined in this file. As this type of profile is user-definable, different users may have different definitions.
Do’s & don’ts of editing the export file There are a few rules to follow when editing the export file.
You will find it very useful to familiarize yourself with the different sections of the export file by reading through A closer look at the export file (p. 123).
•
Do not delete the line PROFILE CATALOG EXPORT VERSION = 2. If it does not appear in the file, the import will be canceled.
•
The hierarchical tree structure can always be deleted.
Importing part of the bolt catalog To only import part of a bolt catalog: 1.
124
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Catalogs
Follow the steps in Exporting the bolt catalog (p. 121) to create an export file.
Make a copy of the export file and give it a different name before you edit it, so that it easier to go back and try again if you do not get it right first time.
2. 3. 4. 5.
Edit the file using a text editor such as Microsoft Notepad. Notice that each item in the catalog is listed on a separate line. Delete the unwanted lines from the file. Do not delete these lines: STARTLIST and ENDLIST. Save the file with the same name and file extension. The filename must be screwdb.lis. Follow the steps in Importing the bolt catalog (p. 121) to import the catalog.
Units used in export and import This list of units Tekla Structures uses when exporting and importing only relates to the profile and material catalogs. You will find it useful if you want to write your own import routines for large amounts of data.
Type
Unit (no unit if blank)
Boolean Integer String Ratio Strain Angle
degree
Length
mm
Deformation
mm
Dimension
mm
Radius of inertia
mm
Area
mm2
Reinforcement area
mm2
Transverse reinforcement area
mm2/m
Area/unit length
mm2/m
Volume
mm3
Section modulus
mm3
Moment of inertia
mm4
Torsion constant
mm4
Warping constant
mm6
Force
N
Weight
kg
Distributed load
N/m
Spring constant
N/m
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Catalogs
125
Type
Unit (no unit if blank)
Mass/length
kg/m
Surface load
N/m2
Strength
N/m2
Stress
N/m2
Modulus
N/m2
Density
kg/m3
Moment
Nm
Distributed moment
Nm/m
Rotation spring constant
Nm/rad
Temperature
K (oC)
Thermal dilation coefficient
1/K (1/oC)
Factor
Bolt length calculation The diagram below shows how Tekla Structures calculates bolt length. A full explanation follows the diagram.
126
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Catalogs
Bolt length calculation uses values from the bolt and bolt assembly catalogs. The following illustration from the Bolt properties dialog box shows the values used in bolt length calculation.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Catalogs
127
Checkboxes indicate if the component is used in the assembly. Washer (1) Washer (2) Washer (3) Nut (1) Nut (2) If unchecked, only a hole will be created Explanation
1.
The minimum possible length of the bolt is calculated as follows: washer (1) thickness (if checked) + material thickness + washer (2) thickness (if checked) + washer (3) thickness (if checked) + nut (1) thickness + nut (2) thickness +
128
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Catalogs
extra length 2. 3.
Tekla Structures searches for the closest match in the bolt catalog. The number of fitting washers required (must not exceed 10) is calculated so that the length of the shaft is less than: nut (1) thickness + material thickness + nut (2) thickness + washer (1) thickness + washer (2) thickness + (number of fitting washers*washer (3) thickness)
4.
Tekla Structures checks that the bolt found in step 2 is longer than: extra length + nut (1) thickness + material thickness + nut (2) thickness + add. dist (from bolt catalog) + washer (1) thickness + washer (2) thickness + (number of fitting washers * washer (3) thickness)
5. 6.
If the selected bolt does not fulfill the criteria in step 4, Tekla Structures returns to step 2, otherwise it continues on to step 6. The program checks that the selected bolt satisfies all the following conditions
•
Can the thread be inside the material to be connected? Even if this is not allowed, the calculation always allows 3 or 4 mm of thread to be inside the material, depending on bolt diameter. If bolt diameter ≥ 24 mm, it allows 4 mm, otherwise it allows 3 mm.
•
Shaft length must be more than: material thickness + extra length + washer (1) thickness (if checked) maximum thread in material allowed (if thread in material = no) = 3 mm or 4 mm
•
Shaft length is calculated as: Screw length - screw thread length - thread end.
•
Thread end is the part of the bolt between the shaft and the thread. It is calculated as follows:
Diameter of bolt (mm)
Thread end (mm)
>33.0
10.0
>27.0
8.0
>22.0
7.0
>16.0
6.0
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Catalogs
129
Diameter of bolt (mm)
Thread end (mm)
>12.0
5.0
>7.0
4.0
>4.0
2.5
≤4
1.5
7. 8.
If the selected bolt does not satisfy all the above conditions, Tekla Structures returns to step 2 and tries the next longest bolt. If the variable XS_BOLT_LENGTH_EPSILON is set, the epsilon thickness is added to, or subtracted from, the material thickness, to avoid inaccurate bolt length calculation. As an example, if this value were not taken into account, where the calculated length was 38.001 mm, a 39 mm bolt might be selected. If no value is set, a default value of 0.1 is used.
Polybeam length calculation This section explains how Tekla Structures calculates the length of a polybeam. Two template fields control the length of a polybeam:
•
LENGTH = total length - line cuts + fittings
Part and polygon cut do not affect the calculation.
•
LENGTH_GROSS = total length + fittings
Tekla Structures calculates the length of a beam polygon line between its creation points. Chamfers and fittings are taken into account. Polygon line is either the centerline or reference line, depending on the settings of the variable XS_CALCULATE_POLYBEAM_LENGTH_ALONG_REFERENCE_LINE. If the beam ends are fitted or cut skew, Tekla Structures also checks the other edge, even if it would not locate on the polygon line. If the other edge is longer, Tekla Structures adds the measure to the length and if shorter, the length is unchanged. See the example below. This assures that the length is the minimum length needed to fabricate the beam.
130
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Catalogs
Cut Creation point LENGTH Creation point Fitting The thick line represents the length of the polybeam.
The calculation gives a faulty result with a polybeam, which includes cuts or fittings and where the extension of an end segment intersects with another segment of the polybeam.
See also Polybeam length calculation on the Tekla Extranet.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Catalogs
131
132
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Catalogs
5
AutoConnection
Introduction
You can use AutoConnection to select and apply a connection to parts in a model, using standard connection properties. AutoDefaults allows you to modify standard connection properties and save them for use in specific circumstances. You can define rule groups and rule sets for both AutoConnection and AutoDefaults to use for different conditions within the model.
In this chapter
This chapter introduces AutoConnection, which you can use to automatically create connections in a model. You can use AutoDefaults together with AutoConnection to define connection properties. You can also use AutoDefaults to define connection properties and apply them to a single connection.
Test model
Before using AutoConnections and AutoDefaults in a working model, we recommend that you create a test model, and create all the connection conditions in it that you need for a particular project. You can then use this test model to check the rules and properties of various connection types. It also acts as a quick reference for connection information.
Contents
This chapter concentrates on the following topics:
• • •
AutoConnection setup (p. 133) AutoDefaults setup (p. 137) AutoConnection and AutoDefaults rules (p. 141)
5.1 AutoConnection setup Introduction
Use AutoConnection to automatically select and apply connections with predefined properties to selected parts. With AutoConnection, Tekla Structures automatically creates similar connections for similar framing conditions.
Topics
AutoConnection setup (p. 134) AutoConnection rule groups (p. 135) AutoConnection rule sets (p. 135) Rules.zxt (p. 137) Changing a connection (p. 137)
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 AutoConnection
133
AutoConnection setup With AutoConnection you can define groups of rules which Tekla Structures automatically applies when you use AutoConnection to create connections in a model. For example, you can create separate rules for different standards, projects, manufacturers, and even individual models. By using a rule group to select connections and connection properties, you can create connections automatically, without having to select each connection and define its properties individually. Tree structure
To access the AutoConnection Setup dialog box, click Detailing > AutoConnection > AutoConnection Settings.... The connection types used in various cases are shown in a tree structure:
Icon
Type
Description
Rule group
The 1st level in the tree shows the rule groups. These are user-definable. They help you to group the rules according to different standards, projects, manufacturers, and models.
Framing condition
The 2nd level shows the different predefined framing conditions (connection types). Tekla Structures creates them automatically and you cannot change them. The framing conditions include the following: beam to beam web, beam to beam flange, beam to column web, beam to column flange, beam splice, and column splice.
134
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 AutoConnection
Icon
Type
Description
Rule set
Under each framing condition you can create rule sets to specify which connection to use for specific conditions within the model.
Connection
The connection to apply if the rule set criteria are met.
To apply a particular connection, the conditions within the model have to match all the rules in the branch containing the connection. If you do not want to apply a connection for certain rules sets, right-click the connection name and then select No connection from the pop-up menu.
The order of the rules in the tree is important. Tekla Structures uses the first rule that matches the conditions within the model, so you should place the most limiting rule highest in the tree, and the most generic, lowest. Restrictions
See also
AutoConnection has the following restrictions:
•
You can have a maximum of two secondary parts in the connection (for example, you cannot use complex gussets with several secondaries). AutoConnection uses profile height and ID number as the criteria for determining 1. secondary and 2. secondary parts.
•
AutoDefaults only affects connection parts (clip angles, shear plates, end plates, …), bolts, and welds. AutoDefaults cannot change beam profiles or the connection number.
For more information on rules, see AutoConnection rule groups (p. 135) and AutoConnection rule sets (p. 135). For more information on how to use AutoConnection, see Using AutoConnection.
AutoConnection rule groups Before using AutoConnection, you need to define rule groups, so that you can group the rules according to different standards, projects, manufacturers, etc. To create a new rule group: 1. 2. 3.
Open your test model. Click Detailing > AutoConnection > AutoConnection Settings.... Right-click an existing rule group, and select New rule group from the pop-up menu. Double-click the group New and rename it. Give it a distinctive name.
Give the rule group a name that reflects the group of connections that you want to create. For example, use the fabricator's name, the project name, or any name that will clearly identify the connection rules that you want to use for a specific model. When you create a new rule group, Tekla Structures automatically adds the framing conditions branches under it (beam to beam web, beam to beam flange etc.).
AutoConnection rule sets Each framing condition can contain rule sets, which you can use to specify which connection to use for specific conditions within the model. You only need to create AutoConnection rule sets if you plan to use different connections to connect similar framing conditions.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 AutoConnection
135
For example, you have beam to beam connections, some require clip angles, others need shear tabs. In this case, you need to set up rule sets to determine where each connection type should be used. Creating a rule set
To add a new rule set under a framing condition: 1. 2. 3.
Right-click the framing condition. A pop-up menu appears. Select New rule set. A New entry appears in the tree. Give the new rule set a descriptive name.
Creating a subrule set
1. 2. 3.
Right-click an existing rule set. A pop-up menu appears. Select Create additional rule sets. A New entry appears in the tree. Give the new subrule set a descriptive name.
Creating a new rule set or subrule set only adds a rule set to the setup tree. You need to define its contents separately. See AutoConnection (p. 133). Editing a rule set
You can edit the contents of a rule set (for example, change the name or add rules to it): 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Right-click the rule set. A pop-up menu appears. Select Edit rule set... to open the AutoConnection Rules dialog box. Select a rule from the Available rules list. Click the right arrow button to move the selected rule into the list of rules in the rule set. In the right pane under Rules in rule set, fill in the acceptable values for the rule. You can either define an exact value, or minimum and maximum values. The name you enter in the Rule set name field is shown in the setup tree.
The order of the rules in the tree is important. Tekla Structures uses the first rule that matches the conditions within the model, so you should place the most limiting rule highest in the tree, and the most generic, lowest. You can change the priority of a rule set by right-clicking the rule set and selecting Move Up or Move Down. For more information on rules, see AutoConnection and AutoDefaults rules (p. 141).
136
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 AutoConnection
Rules.zxt When you use AutoConnection, Tekla Structures creates an Attributes subfolder in the current model folder and saves the AutoConnection information in a zipped text file called rules.zxt. You can copy this file to the project or firm folders to make it available for other models (see also Project and firm folders (p. 75)). Each time you modify AutoConnection setup you need to recopy this file to the firm and/or project folders. When you copy this file for use in other projects, remember to restart Tekla Structures to use the new setup.
We do not recommend that you edit the rules.zxt file using a text editor, but if you do so, check that you use the right syntax. The easiest way to unpack the zxt file is to change the file extension zxt to txt.gz and unpack the file using WinZip. Change the extension back to zxt when you have finished. You do not need to zip the file after editing it, Tekla Structures can also read the unzipped file.
Changing a connection To change the connection in a rule set, use the Connection Browser dialog box which lists all the Tekla Structures connections available in the connection toolbars. To open the Connection Browser: 1. 2. 3. Deleting an item
Right-click a connection in the AutoConnection Setup tree. A pop-up menu appears. Select Select connection type... to open the Connection Browser dialog box. Select a connection and click OK to update the tree.
Use the Delete rule set command in the pop-up menu to delete a rule set from the Setup tree. This also deletes its subrule sets.
5.2 AutoDefaults setup Introduction
Use AutoDefaults to automatically apply connections. With AutoDefaults you can create rules defining when to use different connection properties.
Topics
AutoDefaults setup (p. 138) Connection properties files (p. 139) Defaults.zxt (p. 140) Priority of rule sets (p. 140) Editing connection properties (p. 140) For more information on how to use AutoDefaults, see Using AutoDefaults.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 AutoConnection
137
AutoDefaults setup With AutoDefaults you can create rules defining when to use different predefined connection properties. When you modify connections (for example changing the beam size), Tekla Structures automatically redefines the connection properties using AutoDefaults setup. Use AutoDefaults to modify standard connection properties and save the modified properties for use in specific situations. Tree structure
To open the AutoDefaults setup dialog box, click Detailing > AutoConnection > AutoDefaults Settings.... The connection types used in various cases are shown in a tree structure:
Icon
Type
Description
Rule group
The 1st level in the tree contains rule groups. The rule groups are userdefinable. They help you to group rules according to different standards, projects, manufacturers, and models.
Connection page
The next two levels show all the connections available on the toolbars. They are predefined and you cannot change them.
Connection
Rule sets
138
Rule set
Under each connection you can create rule sets to specify which connection properties to use when specific conditions within the model are met.
Connection properties file
Every branch in the tree ends with connection properties file(s) (for example, standard.j144). You can save connection properties that you want to use again. See Saving connection properties (p. 139).
You define AutoDefaults rule sets in the same way as AutoConnection rule sets. See AutoConnection rule sets (p. 135).
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 AutoConnection
Tekla Structures saves the AutoDefaults rules in the defaults.zxt file in the current model folder. You may want to copy defaults.zxt and all the connection properties files associated with it (for example, sec_0-190.j141) to the firm or project folders to use in other models. See Defaults.zxt (p. 140).
Connection properties files By default, each connection has a standard properties file which defines the standard properties for the connection (for example, standard.j144). You can save connection properties that you want to use again in separate properties files and give them a distinctive name.
Saving connection properties To save connection properties for later use in similar conditions within the model, you can save them in a properties file: 1. 2.
Set the properties you want to save (for example, bolt, profile, material properties). In the Save as field, enter a distinctive name for the connection properties. Enter the same name in the Connection code field and click Save as.
When you save connection properties to use with AutoDefaults, it is a good idea to enter the same name in the Save as and Connection code fields on the General tab. This means you can easily check later which properties Tekla Structures used in specific situations. Tekla Structures does not automatically show the AutoDefault values in the connection properties fields. Tekla Structures creates the properties file in an Attributes subfolder in the current model folder. The filename consists of the name you entered in Save as and the extension .jXXX, where XXX is the connection number (for example, sec_0-190.j141).
Access to properties files To view the list of properties files for a certain connection: 1. 2. 3.
In the AutoDefaults Setup tree, select a properties file (for example, standard.j144). Right-click the selected properties file. A pop-up menu appears. Click Select connection parameters.... Tekla Structures displays the Attribute File List dialog box, containing the existing properties files for the connection.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 AutoConnection
139
Defaults.zxt When you use AutoDefaults, Tekla Structures creates an Attributes sub-folder in the current model folder and saves the AutoDefaults setup in a zipped text file, defaults.zxt. You can copy this file to the project or firm folders to make it available in other models. See also Project and firm folders (p. 75)). Each time you modify the AutoDefaults setup, you need to recopy this file to the firm, or project folders. When you copy this file for use in other projects, remember to restart Tekla Structures to use the new setup.
We do not recommend that you edit the defaults.zxt file using a text editor, but if you do so, check that you use the right syntax. The easiest way to unpack the .zxt file is to change the file extension zxt to txt.gz and unpack the file using WinZip. Change the extension back to zxt when you have finished. You do not need to repack the file after editing it, Tekla Structures can also read the unpacked file.
Priority of rule sets Tekla Structures processes AutoDefaults rule sets in the order in which they appear in the tree, so you can control the selection of properties. Usually, one framing condition, profile type, and orientation can have several property combinations, for example, a different profile height. Example
For example, if you have properties files and rules for maximum profile heights of 150, 160, 170 and 190 mm, and AutoDefaults is selecting properties for a height of 158 mm, three properties files are valid. AutoDefaults selects the first one to match (in this case, 160 mm). Where there is no match, you will need a default rule and properties file.You should set the default rule so that it does not define the profile height and is the last item in the branch. In this way the default rule will always be the last one to match and any properties file that matches the profile height will override it.
Editing connection properties To edit connection properties in the AutoDefaults Setup tree: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Right-click a connection standard.j file (for example, standard.j144). A pop-up menu appears. Select Edit connection parameters to open the connection dialog box. Set the properties as you would when manually creating connections. Type a descriptive name for these properties in the Save as text box and click Save as. Use a name that distinguishes these as AutoDefaults setup. Click Cancel to close the dialog box and return to the AutoDefaults setup dialog box.
If you click OK to close the dialog box, you need to load the default properties next time you use this connection. This ensures that AutoDefaults can modify the properties.
6. 7.
140
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 AutoConnection
Right-click the standard.j again. Click Select connection parameters.... The Attribute File List opens. It contains the properties that have been set and saved in the connection dialog box.
8.
You can now apply any of the properties that have been saved in a rule set.
5.3 AutoConnection and AutoDefaults rules Introduction
You can use the rules listed in the sections below to accurately select connections and connection properties when using AutoConnection and AutoDefaults. Using these rules you can create your own standards to apply project or company defaults.
General
The general rules are:
• •
Profile name: the name in the Name field in the Profile catalog dialog box. Profile type: use the following table to find the correct number:
Profile type
Number
I
1
L
2
Z
3
U
4
Plate
5
Round bar
6
Pipe
7
Square pipe
8
C
9
T
10
ZZ
15
CC
16
CW
17
Polygon plate
51
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 AutoConnection
141
• • • Orientation
Number of secondaries. Number of primaries. Material name.
Depending on the relative angle a beam, the connections can be classified as:
•
Sloped angle (relative to primary part cross section) The longitudinal axis of the secondary part follows the slope of the longitudinal axis of the primary part.
•
Skewed angle (relative to primary part longitudinal axis) The longitudinal axis of the secondary part is skewed according to the primary part cross section. The angle is the smaller of the angles between the longitudinal axis of the secondary part and the primary part Z or Y axis.
•
Cant angle For rotated secondary parts.
Sloped, skewed, and cant angle value can be 0 - 90 degrees. Do not use negative values.
Dimensions
• •
Profile depth Web depth For profiles with an upper and lower flange, web depth is: h - t1 - t2 - 2*r1 Or, if t2 is zero: h - 2*t - 2*r1
142
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 AutoConnection
For profiles with one flange, web depth is h - t - r1 - r2.
Forces and strengths
• • • • •
Web thickness Flange thickness Shear force Axial force Bending moment
Combining and iterating properties AutoDefaults includes these features:
Using these features
Feature
Description
Combining
You can save connection properties files covering different groups of properties, then use these files to define many rules. For example you can have one file for bolt properties and another for profile properties. Tekla Structures combines the files when it runs AutoDefaults.
Iterating
Tekla Structures tests properties until the connection symbol is yellow or green. Iteration changes connection properties automatically if connection fails, even if the rules would match. If Connection Check is set on, the iteration results in connection properties that have passed the check.
To use either of these features for a rule set: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Click Detailing > AutoConnection > AutoDefault Settings... Browse the tree and right-click a rules set. Select Edit rule set... Set Parameters files selection to one of the following options:
Option
Description
Use combination of first parameters
Tekla Structures uses the properties files it finds in the first matching sub-rule set and does not check other rule sets.
Iterate until the connection symbol is green
Tekla Structures checks sub rule sets until it finds matching properties that leave the connection symbol green.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 AutoConnection
143
Option
Description
Iterate until the connection symbol is yellow
Tekla Structures checks sub rule sets until it finds matching properties that leave the connection symbol yellow.
Use combination of all parameters
Tekla Structures checks all rule sets and uses properties files in all matching rule sets. The order of properties files is important, since the last overrides.
The order of files in the tree is important. When Tekla Structures combines the properties files, the most recent files (the lowest in the tree) override previous ones. If you leave properties blank, Tekla Structures does not override previous properties with blank properties.
Limitations Tekla Structures cannot iterate properties files directly. Use a single iteration rule set with sub rule sets. You cannot have many parallel iteration rule sets. Use a single iteration rule set and place it just before the default rule set. Place the combination rule sets above the iteration rule set in the tree. Combination rule sets can only be one level deep. Tekla Structures disregards empty rule sets, so include at least one rule in each rule set. See also
Combining properties (p. 144) Iteration with connection check (p. 145)
Combining properties The AutoDefaults combine feature combines separate properties files into one file. This means you define fewer files, because you use one file for several rules. If files contain different values for the same property, Tekla Structures uses the last property it finds. See the image below.
144
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 AutoConnection
See also
Combining and iterating properties (p. 143)
Iteration with connection check This example shows how you can use the iteration feature of AutoDefaults. In this example iteration sets the number of bolts according to the result of the connection check. When using this rule group for a connection in the model, AutoDefaults sets the number of bolts until the connection symbol is green.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 AutoConnection
145
The iteration rule forces Tekla Structures to tests sub rules until the connection symbol is green in the model. Creating iteration rules
First, create connection properties files for each number of bolts. See Editing connection properties (p. 140). 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.
14. Using rules and check together
Click Detailing > AutoConnection > AutoDefaults Settings... Right-click the tree and select New rule group. Click the rule group and rename it to "Iteration example". Browse the tree and find connection 144. Right-click it and select Create additional rule sets.... Right-click the rule set and select Edit rule set..., to open the AutoDefault rules dialog box. Change the Rule set name to "ITERATION". Set Parameters file selection to Iterate until the connection symbol is green. Click OK. To create a rule set "2 bolts", right-click the first rule set and select Create additional rule sets.... Right-click the new rule set and select Edit rule set.... AutoDefault rules dialog box appears. Select rule Secondary 1 depth and set the minimum and maximum depth values for two bolts. Set Parameters file selection to Use combination of first parameters. Click OK. Right-click the connection properties file standard.j144, and click Select connection parameters.. to open the Attribute File List dialog box. Select the properties file for two bolts and click OK. Repeat steps 8 to 13 for other rule sets.
You can use the connection check result when applying AutoDefaults with iteration. If a rule matches, but connection do not pass the check and symbol remains red, AutoDefaults continues testing other rules and properties until the connection symbol is green. To apply a rule group and connection check for a connection: 1. 2.
146
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 AutoConnection
Open the connection properties dialog box. Load the properties.
3. 4. 5. 6. Checking
Click General tab and set AutoDefaults Rule Group to the "Iteration example" you created. Click Design type tab and set Connection check to Yes. Enter the load from secondary members in the fields Shear, Tension, Moment. Click OK to create the connection.
To see which rules AutoDefaults used, right-click the connection symbol, and select Inquire. To see which values AutoDefaults set, double-click the connection symbol to open the connection dialog box, select , then click Load.
Reaction forces and UDL You can save reaction forces:
• •
In the user-defined attributes of a part (for AutoConnection and AutoDefaults). On the Design tab in the connection dialog box (for AutoDefaults).
Using reaction forces
When you use reaction forces in a rule and AutoDefaults is activate, Tekla Structures first searches for reaction forces in the corresponding connection’s properties. If they do not contain reaction forces, Tekla Structures searches the user-defined attributes of the secondary part of the connection. If Tekla Structures finds no forces there, you cannot use reaction force rules.
Shear force calculation
Shear force calculation is the exception. If you have not given any reaction force values, shear force is calculated using the UDL shear force routine. The UDL calculation is based on the AISC ASD Specification and is mainly intended for use with imperial units. It uses the yield stress value, profile dimensions, and UDL percentage to calculate the maximum allowable shear force. Tekla Structures compares the result with the Shear force rule in AutoDefaults.
• • •
Yield stress is defined in the material catalog. Profile dimensions come from the profile catalog. UDL percentage is taken either from the connection dialog box or from a variable.
UDL for AutoConnection
To switch on UDL calculation for AutoConnection:
UDL for AutoDefaults
To switch on UDL calculation for AutoDefaults:
1. 2.
• •
On the Design tab in the connection dialog box, set the field Use UDL to Yes. Enter the UDL percentage in the UDL % field. If this field is blank, Tekla Structures uses a default percentage (set using the variable XS_AUTODEFAULT_UDL_PERCENT).
Set the variable XS_AUTOCONNECTION_USE_UDL to TRUE. Use the variable XS_AUTODEFAULT_UDL_PERCENT to set the UDL percentage.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 AutoConnection
147
148
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 AutoConnection
6
CNC
Introduction
CNC (Computer Numerical Control) refers to the operation of a machine tool via motors, switches, and so on, with a computer controlling the manufacturing process. During the manufacturing process a machine tool or machining center cuts or shapes the piece of material.
In this chapter
This chapter describes how to export CNC data from Tekla Structures models for use by machine tools. We explain how to export the data in different formats, such as DSTV, and DXF. We describe how to generate pop-marks in NC files. Pop marks are small holes that help the shop assemble individual parts to form an assembly. Then we explain how to generate hard stamps in NC files. Hard stamps are text marks that can contain various kind of information about parts.
Contents
This chapter is divided into the following sections:
• • • • •
NC files (p. 149) DSTV (p. 159) DXF (p. 161) Pop-marks (p. 162) Hard stamps (p. 165)
6.1 NC files After you finish detailing in Tekla Structures, you can deliver the results to the next phase. You can use CNC links to send the information directly to automatic cutting and welding machines, or produce data for MIS systems (management information systems). Formats
Tekla Structures produces NC files in the following formats: 1. 2.
DSTV DXF
Tekla Structures creates the files from completed regions of the Tekla Structures model. Tekla Structures translates part length, hole positions, bevels, notches, and cuts into sets of coordinates that sawing, drilling and profile burners can use to create the part in the shop.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 CNC
149
DSTV format is an industrial standard defined by the German Steel Construction Association. Often NC machines can use these files directly to punch, drill, and cut parts. For other machines you may need to translate DSTV files to suit the specific machine. If you need machine-specific files, you may have to post-process the NC files Tekla Structures produces, using an NC Translator program.
Tekla Structures model NC files NC software NC machine Finished machined part To define NC settings and create NC files, go to File > CNC > NC files... Topics
Setting up NC files (p. 150) Pop-mark settings (p. 163) Defining destination machines for parts (p. 151) Defining hole properties (p. 155) Creating NC files (p. 157) Defining the output format and folder (p. 159)
Setting up NC files Use the NC file settings dialog box to edit machine-specific settings, such as the file format. This helps you sort NC files into machine-specific folders. You can also specify that different parts be machined by different NC machines, for example, plates by one machine, drilled parts by another, etc.
150
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 CNC
NC file settings Plates Plasma cut Drilled parts To set up NC files: 1. 2.
Click File > Export > CNC > Create NC Files... Click Add to open the NC file settings dialog box, which contains several tabs:
Tab
Description
More information
Files and part selection
Output format, the profile types that machines can handle, and maximum hole diameters
Defining the output format and folder (p. 159)
Holes and cuts
Slot conversion options
Defining hole properties (p. 155)
Hard stamp
Hard stamp options
Hard stamp properties (p. 165)
Defining selection criteria (p. 152)
Tekla Structures saves the settings files in the attributes folder under the current model folder. See also
Pop-mark settings (p. 163) Defining destination machines for parts (p. 151) Creating NC files (p. 157) Fittings affect NC data (p. 160)
Defining destination machines for parts To define the limits of an NC machine: 1.
Open the NC file settings dialog box and go to the Files and Part selection tab.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 CNC
151
2.
In the Selection criteria for parts section, use the Maximum size and Profile type fields to define the limits of the NC machine, for parts and profile types. Larger parts will be sent to the next machine.
Tekla Structures uses DSTV standard names for profile types: I, U, L, M, R, B, CC, T, SO. See also Profile type (p. 153). See also
Creating NC files (p. 157)
Defining selection criteria Each NC file setting is meant for one NC machine. The selection criteria determine the part types and maximum sizes the machine is meant to or able to process. To define the selection criteria: 1. 2. 3.
152
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 CNC
Click File > Export > CNC > Create NC Files... The NC Files dialog box appears. Select a setting from the list and click Edit.... If the list is empty, click Add... to create new settings. In the NC file settings dialog box, define the selection criteria.
Maximum size The maximum size options define the maximum length, width, and height of the parts the machine can handle. Larger parts are sent to other machines.
Profile type The machine can handle all the profile types which have the option Yes in the Profile type list. Profile types are named according to the DSTV (p. 159) standard:
DSTV profile type
Description
I
I profiles
U
U and C profiles
L
Angle profiles
M
Rectangular tubes
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 CNC
153
DSTV profile type
Description
R
Round bars and tubes
B
Plate profiles
CC
CC profiles
T
Tee shaped profiles
SO
Z profiles and all the other types of profile
The DTSV standard does not support curved beams, so Tekla Structures does not support them, either.
Round tubes
By default Tekla Structures unwraps round tubes as plate profiles and uses the plate profile type B in the NC file header data. To change this, use the variable XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_USE_PLATE_PROFILE_TYPE_IN_NC.
Maximum size of holes The Maximum size of holes box defines what parts NC files are created for. The NC file is not created if a part contains larger holes or its material is thicker than the values specified in a row in this box. The hole size is connected to material thickness or plate thickness. Each row contains the maximum hole diameter and material thickness. Both conditions have to be met for the NC file to be created. For example, a row with the values 60 45 means that when the material thickness is 45 mm or smaller and the hole diameter is 60 mm or smaller, the NC file is created. You can add as many rows as needed. Example
The following example shows how the Maximum size of holes can be defined. The NC file settings are defined for the following situation:
• •
Three plates of different thickness Two bolt groups with equal sizes, and one bolt group with a larger size
The NC file settings are defined in the Maximum size of holes box in the NC File Settings dialog box as follows: Test1 creates a folder under the model folder for the plates that fit the following criteria:
• •
Hole diameter: 22 Thickness of plates: 10
Test2 creates a folder under the model folder for the plates that fit the following criteria:
• 154
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 CNC
Hole diameter: 22
•
Thickness of plates: 20
When you create NC files for the plates, the folder Test1 includes the plate PL350*10 and the folder Test2 includes the plate PL350*20. The plate PL350*15 is not included in any folder, because the the hole size criterium is not met.
The order in which you enter the criteria is important: enter the most exclusive criteria first. If you define the criteria in a different order, also the results will be different.
Defining hole properties Open the NC File Settings dialog box and go to the Holes and cuts tab. You have the following options: Inner corner shape
The option Inner corner shape is used to change the shape of inner corners for the NC file. Inner corners are for example web copes or flange cuts at the beam end. The examples in the table below show how the different inner corner shape options affect the part in the NC file. The original part in the model looks like in the picture below, flanges are cut entirely and web is coped.
Option 0
Example
Description Radius The inner corners are shaped like holes with given radius. A separate BO-block is not written to the NC file.
1
Tangential The inner corner is rounded by the value given into the Radius field.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 CNC
155
Option 2
Example
Description Square The corner is as it is in the model.
3
Drilled hole A drilled hole is added to the inner corner. Hole radius is the same as the value in the Radius field. Holes are written as a seprate BOblock to the NC file.
The inner corner shape affects also cuts on the flange.
Limitationsof the inner corner shape
Inner corner shape is not applied to rectangular openings, which are at the middle of a part, like in the picture below.
Inner corner shape does not apply to those inner contours, which are already rounded in the model. The model values are kept. CNC flange clearance
The height of the clearance area is defined in the NC File Settings dialog box on the Holes and cuts tab with the field Distance from flange within which web is not cut. If a cut in a part is located closer the flange than the clearance in the model, the cut points inside that clearance are moved to the border of the clearance area when the NC file is written.
156
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 CNC
Model
NC file This picture shows how the part is modeled. The cut goes closer to the top flange than the defined flange clearance in the NC file settings.
This picture shows how the part is written to the NC files. The dimension shows the clearance. The top of the original cut is moved so that the clearance area is left free. The bottom of the cut is not moved.
The clearance check only affects the following DSTV profile types:
• • • • Machine slots as:
I U C L
These options define slotted holes.
• • • • •
Ignore slots: deletes slotted holes A single hole in the center of the slot: drills a single hole in the center of the slotted hole Four small holes, one at each corner: drills 4 smaller holes, one at each corner Internal contours: flame-cuts the slots as internal contours Slots: leaves slots as they are.
Maximum hole diameter
Holes and slotted holes that are larger than the maximum hole diameter are manufactured as internal contours.
Maximum size of holes
Use the Maximum size of holes section of the Files and part selection tab to define the maximum hole diameter for different plate thicknesses. Once you have finished defining NC settings, click OK to save your changes and close the NC file settings dialog box.
See also
Creating NC files (p. 157)
Creating NC files To create NC files: If necessary, define the NC file settings. See Setting up NC files (p. 150). 1.
Go to the NC files dialog box, or click File > Export > CNC > Create NC Files... to open it.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 CNC
157
2. 3.
Select the Create checkboxes in the NC file settings section to indicate which NC file settings to use. Against the Create files for field, select a checkbox to indicate the parts you want to create NC files for:
• • 4.
All parts Selected parts
Click Create to create the NC files.
Tekla Structures does not create NC files for curved beams.
See also
Setting up NC files (p. 150) Defining the output format and folder (p. 159)
Creating tube NC files To be able to create NC files for tubular hollow sections, you need to first use the specific tube components to create tube-to-tube and tube-to-plate connections. After using the components, you can create an NC file for data export from Tekla Structures to the CNC machine. The tube NC file creation results into an XML file which includes the model data. To create tube NC files: 1.
Usage
Go to File > Export > Create Tube NC files.... The HGG Tube NC Files dialog box opens.
2.
Set the name for the export file, and browse for the location where you want to save the file.
3.
Select whether you want to create the file for selected parts or for all parts.
4.
Click Create to create the NC file. Tekla Structures creates an XML file and a log file in the location you have defined.
To get the correct tube NC export results, you must use the specific tube components for creating tube fittings and cuts. Cuts and fittings created manually or by other components will not be exported in the tube NC file creation. See also
Tube-Chamfer (1) Tube-CrossingSaddle (1) Tube-MitreSaddle+Hole (1) Tube-Saddle+Hole (1) Tube-SlottedHole (1)
158
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 CNC
Defining the output format and folder Format
Use the options in NC file settings > Files and part selection, File format field to select the file format. For more information on formats, see:
• • Folder
DSTV (p. 159) DXF (p. 161)
By default Tekla Structures creates NC files in the current model folder. To change this: 1. 2. 3.
Go to the Files and part selection tab. Click the Browse button next to the File location field. In the Set file location dialog box, locate the correct folder. If the folder does not exist, use the Create New Folder button to create it.
You must select a file in the destination folder to get the folder selected in the File location field. It does not matter which file you select. If there are no files in the folder, create one there, for example an empty .txt file.
4. Relative paths
Click OK. Tekla Structures displays the folder path in the File location field.
You can also enter a folder name or a relative path directly in the File location field. The following table shows where the NC files are created with different values of the File location field, when the variable XS_MIS_FILE_DIRECTORY is set to C:\NC.
File location
NC files are created to C:\NC
.\
C:\NC\ModelName
.\MyFiles
C:\NC\ModelName\MyFiles
C:\TEMP
C:\TEMP
The following table shows where the NC files are created with different values of the File location field, when the variable XS_MIS_FILE_DIRECTORY is NOT set.
File location
NC files are created to model folder
See also
.\
model folder
.\MyFiles
model folder\MyFiles
C:\TEMP
C:\TEMP
Setting up NC files (p. 150) Creating NC files (p. 157)
6.2 DSTV DSTV format is an industrial standard defined by the German Steel Construction Association.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 CNC
159
The data for NC output comes from the model. We recommend that you complete detailing and create drawings prior to producing NC output. To create DSTV files: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Select the parts from which you want to create NC files. Click File > Export > CNC > Create NC Files... to display the NC files dialog box. Click Add to display the NC file settings dialog box. Go to the File format field on the Files and part selection tab and select DSTV. In the Settings name field, enter a distinctive name for the settings. Click OK to save your settings and close the NC file settings dialog box. Go to the NC File settings section of the NC files dialog box and select the DSTV file settings you created. Select the Selected parts checkbox. Click Create.
This will create nc1 files for all selected parts and put them in the model folder. The filename consists of a position number and the extension nc1. See also
Pop-marks (p. 162) Setting up NC files (p. 150) Defining the output format and folder (p. 159)
Fittings affect NC data When creating NC files in DSTV format, the method you use to cut the end of the beam affects beam length in the NC file. The illustration below shows the default length when you have fitting and line cuts.
Fitting affects the length Line cut does not affect length Line cut Fitting
160
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 CNC
The overall length of a beam will be the fitted net length of the beam. This means that Tekla Structures always takes the fitting into account when calculating beam length. For lines, polygons, or part cuts, the cut does not affect beam length, but the overall length in the NC/ DSTV file will be the gross (initial modeled) length of the beam. Shortest length
If you want to use the shortest possible length in the NC file, you can change this so that the cut affects part length: 1. 2.
Net and cross length
Open the Advanced options dialog and enter 1 in the Value field for variable XS_DSTV_NET_LENGTH in the CNC category. Restart Tekla Structures.
If you want to include both net and cross length into NC file header data, set the variable XS_DSTV_PRINT_NET_AND_GROSS_LENGTH.
6.3 DXF This section explains how to create NC data in 2D DXF format. Preconditions
Before running a DXF conversion, you must first create NC files in DSTV format. For more information, see DSTV (p. 159). You can then use a separate Tekla Structures program, dstv2dxf.exe to convert the files to DXF format. The program converts NC DSTV files to 2D DXF files. Tekla Structures only writes one side of a part (front, top, back or bottom) to file, so this export format is most suited to plates.
Topics
Converting DSTV files to DXF (p. 161)
Converting DSTV files to DXF The most convenient way to convert DSTV files to DXF files is to use the macro Convert_DSTV2DXF, located in Tools > Macros.... You can also use a dstv2dxf converter to convert DSTV files to DXF files. To start the conversion: 1. 2.
3.
Save the *.nc1 file(s) in the dstv2dxf folder. Double-click the suitable dstv2dxf conversion .bat file (for example tekla_dstv2dxf_metric_conversion.bat) in the TeklaStructures/ 15.0/nt/dstv2dxf folder. The converter converts the files to dxf format in the same folder.
If you need to adjust the conversion settings, edit the settings in the file dstv2dxf.def and restart the conversion. For more information on settings, see the document DEF File Description.pdf in the same folder.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 CNC
161
6.4
Pop-marks Tekla Structures can generate pop-marks in NC files to help position parts that will be manually welded to the main part. Pop-marks are usually made using a drilling machine. To include pop-marks in the NC file, you have to define a list of part names to pop-mark in the Pop-mark settings dialog box. To access the dialog box, select File > Export > CNC > Create NC Files... > Pop-marks...
You can save the pop-mark settings in a .ncp file, which Tekla Structures saves in the attributes folder under the current model folder by default. Tekla Structures only creates pop-marks for parts for which you have defined properties. The Pop-marking options tab in the Pop-mark settings dialog box contains options for controlling the settings for marks in the back of parts, and other additional options. For more information on these settings, see Pop-marking options (p. 164). To have Tekla Structures create pop-marks when creating NC files, select the check box in NC files > NC file settings: > Pop-marks.
Pop-marking also affects numbering. For example, if two parts have different pop-marks, or one part has popmarks and the other one does not, Tekla Structures gives the parts different numbers. See What affects numbering.
Creating pop-marks To create pop-marks in an NC file: 1. 2. 3.
Define and save the pop-mark settings in the Pop-mark settings (p. 163) dialog box. To display pop-marks in a model view, select Pop-marking options > Show pop-marks in the model. Create the NC files. Remember to select the Pop-marks checkbox in the NC files dialog box.
Pop-marks are written in the NC file BO block as 0 mm diameter holes. Tekla Structures displays thick red lines for each pop-mark pair in the model view which was last updated.
162
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 CNC
Topics
Pop-mark settings (p. 163) Pop-marking options (p. 164)
Pop-mark settings The Pop-mark settings dialog box includes pop-mark settings that define:
• •
Which parts are pop-marked Where the pop-marks are created
Tekla Structures saves the settings file .ncp in the attributes folder under the current model folder. Tekla Structures looks for this file in the current model folder, then uses the standard folder search order. See Folder search order (p. 73). You can use wildcards (* ? [ ] ) in the Main part name and Secondary part name fields in the Pop-mark settings dialog box. For example, HE* matches all parts with a profile name that begins with the characters "HE". For more information on wildcards, see Wildcards.
The order of the lines in the dialog box is important. Tekla Structures uses the match it finds, so you should put the most limiting definition first, and the most generic one last.
Pop-mark settings
Option
Description
Main part profile type
The main part profile types to pop-mark. The list box contains profile types corresponding to the DSTV standard.
Main part name
The main part profile names to pop-mark. You can enter several part names separated by commas.
Sec part profile type
Secondary part profile type.
Secondary part name
Secondary part name. You can enter several part names separated by commas.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 CNC
163
Option
Description
Pop-mark location
Defines how the secondary part is projected onto a main part.
•
Left side: The left side of the secondary part is marked on the main part. The left side is the side of the secondary part that points in the negative direction of the main part local coordinate system.
•
Right side: The right side of the secondary
part is marked on the main part.
•
Both sides: combines Left side and Right side.
• •
Center: Center of the secondary part. Left side holes: Marks the main part with the hole positions on the left side of the secondary.
•
Right side holes: Marks the main part with the hole positions on the right side of the secondary.
•
Both side holes: combines Left side holes and Right side holes.
•
Middle line: Marks two points on the middle line of the secondary part x axis.
Edge distance
Minimum distance from a pop-mark to the edge of the main part. Tekla Structures does not create pop-marks inside this distance. If a pop-mark is inside the defined edge distance, Tekla Structures moves it (with the exception of Center).
Move to flange
Moves pop-marks to the main part flange.
Secondary popmarks
Creates pop-marks into secondary parts.
Pop-marking options Options for marks in the back
Other options
Use the options for marks in the back face of parts to set the NC machine to:
• •
Rotate the part if there are items on the back of it and none on the front.
•
Rotate the part and drill pop-marks through to the back if there are no items on the front but some in the back or more pop-marks on the back than on the front. The hole diameter must also be defined.
• •
No pop-marks on overlapping holes deletes a pop-mark if a hole overlaps it.
Drill the pop-marks through to the back, if there are no other items there. The hole diameter must also be defined.
Pop-mark centres of studs adds pop-marks to the center point of studs. Uncheck this
option to prevent studs from being pop-marked.
• Examples
164
Show pop-marks in the model displays pop-marks in model views.
The following line in the Pop-mark settings dialog box tells Tekla Structures to mark the center point of all round secondary profiles on a main part, and not to create pop-marks closer than 10 mm to the main part edge.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 CNC
The following line in the Pop-mark settings dialog box tells Tekla Structures to project the hole locations in secondary plates onto a main part:
6.5 Hard stamps Tekla Structures can output DSTV files that include hard stamps for the workshop to apply to main and secondary parts. Hard stamps are text marks that contain information about parts and assemblies, for example, project and lot number, phase, or part and assembly position.
Creating hard stamps To include hard stamps in a DSTV file: 1. 2. 3. 4.
In the NC file settings dialog box, go to the Hard stamps tab. Select the checkbox Create hard stamp. In the Available elements list, select the elements to include in the hard stamp. Click OK to save your settings and close the NC file settings dialog box.
Example
This example shows a hard stamp that contains the elements Phase, Part position, Material, and Text.
See also
For more information on hard stamp settings, see Hard stamp properties (p. 165), XS_SECONDARY_PART_HARDSTAMP and XS_HARD_STAMP_BY_ORIENTATION_MARK.
Hard stamp properties Use the options on the Hard stamp tab to define the properties of hard stamps on main and/or secondary parts, including:
• • • • •
Information contained in hard stamps (p. 166) The order in which the different elements appear Text height and case Position of hard stamps (p. 166) Hard stamps for secondary parts (p. 166)
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 CNC
165
Information contained in hard stamps You can include the following information in hard stamps:
Element
Description
Project number
Adds the project number to the hard stamp.
Lot number
Adds the lot number to the hard stamp.
Phase
Adds the phase number to the hard stamp.
Part position
Prefix and position number of the part
Assembly position
Prefix and position number of the assembly
Material
The material of the part.
Finish
The type of finish.
User-defined attribute
Adds a user-defined attribute (user fields 1-4) to the mark.
Text
Opens a dialog box where you can add userdefined text to the hard stamp.
If you include part position and/or assembly position in the hard stamp, they affect the DSTV filename as follows:
• • •
Part position: P1.nc1, P2.nc1 Assembly position: A1.nc1, A2.nc1 Assembly and part position: A1-P1.nc1, A2-P2.nc1
Position of hard stamps Use the options in the Position along the part and Position in depth of part list boxes to define the position of hard stamps on parts. The options are:
• • • • • • • • •
Middle, Middle Middle, Left Middle, Right Bottom, Middle Bottom, Left Bottom, Right Top, Middle Top, Left Top, Right
Hard stamps for secondary parts To create hardstamps also for secondary parts, set XS_SECONDARY_PART_HARDSTAMP to TRUE in Tools > Advanced options > CNC.
Tekla Structures does not create hard stamps for plates.
166
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 CNC
7
Introduction
Import and export
Tekla Structures includes several tools you can use to import and export models and the information they contain. You can:
• •
Import data from other software and use it to create models and reports. Export data from Tekla Structures to use in manufacturing information systems and structural analysis programs.
In this chapter
This chapter explains how to import and export data in Tekla Structures, and describes the formats and tools available. The first section covers the basics of import and export. The final two sections give more details about the import and export options.
Assumed background
You should have some experience of modeling in Tekla Structures.
Contents
This chapter is divided into the following sections:
• • • • •
Import and export basics (p. 167) Conversion files (p. 172) Importing models (p. 175) Exporting files (p. 199) Tekla WebViewer (p. 251)
7.1 Import and export basics This section gives you an overview of importing and exporting data in Tekla Structures, as well as step-by-step instructions. It includes the different import and export formats available in Tekla Structures. It also describes the conversion files you can use to import profiles and materials. Topics
Using import and export (p. 168) Available formats (p. 168) Re-importing a model (p. 177) Revision control options (p. 178)
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
167
Creating reports of import (p. 179)
Using import and export You can use import and export in Tekla Structures for several purposes:
•
Import 2D or 3D models created by other software, then detail them using Tekla Structures. Once detailing is complete, export the model and return it to the architect or engineer for review.
•
Export Tekla Structures models to use in analysis and design (several formats). Then import the design and analysis results back to the Tekla Structures model.
•
Export data for use in the fabrication phase:
•
You can export CNC data (Computer Numerical Control) for use by automated cutting, boring and welding machinery,
•
MIS (Manufacturing Information Systems) so that fabricators can track project progress.
Available formats The following tables list many of the different software and formats you can use in Tekla Structures to import and export data. Locate the software in the first column (Software). Read across the columns to locate import and export tools (for example, DWG/DXF, FEM). Each cell displays the import and export formats (for example, Calma, XML, SDNF). You may also be able to exchange data with software not listed here.
Importing into Tekla Structures
Import tool –> Software
DWG/ DXF
ArchiCAD
2D, 3D
AutoCAD
2D, 3D
FEM
CIMsteel
CAD XML
Autodesk Inventor
STEP, IGES (as Reference models)
Bocad
SDNF
BUS Cadmatic Calma
168
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
Other
BUS 2D, 3D Calma
IFC 2X2, 2X3 (as Reference models)
Import tool –> Software
DWG/ DXF
FEM
CIMsteel
CAD
Catia
Other STEP, IGES (as Reference models)
ESA Prima WIN
DSTV
ETABS
CIS2
FabTrol
CIS2
FrameWorks
SDNF PDMS (only straight profiles) FabTrol XML, SteelFab SDNF
GT Strudl
CIS2
DGN (as Reference models) MicasPlus
IFC schema edition
IFC2X, IFC2X2, IFC2X3 (as Reference models)
MicasPlus
MicasPlus
MicroStation
DGN (as Reference models)
ModelDraft Multiframe
2D, 3D
Nastran
STAAD
PDMS
SDNF
PDS
DGN (as Reference models)
Plantview
Plantview
PowerFrame
DSTV
RAMSteel
CIS2
Revit
CIS2
ROBOT RSTAB SACS
DGN (as Reference models)
DSTV 2D, 3D
IFC 2X3
CIS2
DSTV SACS
STP SDNF
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
169
Import tool –> Software
DWG/ DXF
FEM
CIMsteel
SAP 2000
Other
SDNF PDMS (only straight profiles)
SDS/2
CIS2
SESAM S-frame
CAD
SDNF
SACS 2D, 3D
S-frame
SAP2000
SDNF
SmartPlant
CIS2
DGN (as Reference models)
Solid Edge
STEP, IGES (as Reference models)
SolidWorks
STEP, IGES (as Reference models)
SPACE GASS
SDNF
Speedikon
HLI
STAAD
2D, 3D
Stan 3d
STAAD Stan 3d
StruCad
SDNF
Structural for MicroStation TriForma
DGN (as Reference models)
TriForma
CIS2
Exporting from Tekla Structures Export tool –> Software
DWG/DXF
ArchiCAD
2D, 3D
AutoCAD
2D, 3D
FEM
CIMsteel
CAD XML
Autodesk Inventor Bocad
STEP, IGES (1) 3D
SDNF
Cadmatic
XML
Calma
Calma
Catia
170
Other
IFC 2X3
STEP, IGES (1)
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
Export tool –> Software
DWG/DXF
FEM
CIMsteel
FabTrol
CIS2 (Manufacturing )
FrameWorks Plus
CIS2
CAD
Other MIS
EJE
MIS
EPC
MIS
ETABS FEM
CIS2
ESA Prima WIN
SDNF PDMS (only straight profiles)
DSTV
Eureka LPM
CIS1 & 2
Fabtrol
CIS2
FrameWorks
CIS1 & 2
GT Strudl
SDNF, PML
STAAD
IFC schema edition
IFC2X, IFC2X2, IFC2X3
MicroSAS
MicroSAS
MicroStation
3D DGN
ModelDraft Multiframe
PML 2D, 3D
Nastran
STAAD
PDS
SDNF PDMS (only straight profiles with end codes)
PDMS
SDNF
Plantview
Plantview
PowerFrame
CIS2
Revit
IFC 2X3
ROBOT SAP 2000
DGN
DSTV
RAM
RSTAB
3D DGN
DSTV 2D, 3D
DSTV CIS2
SCIA
SDNF PDMS (only straight profiles) SCIA
SDS/2
CIS2
SmartPlant
CIS2
DGN
Solid Edge
STEP, IGES (1)
SolidWorks
STEP, IGES (1)
SPACE GASS
SDNF
Speedikon
HLI
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
171
Export tool –> Software
DWG/DXF
FEM
STAAD
2D, 3D
STAAD
CIMsteel
CAD
Steel 2000
Other MIS
Steelcad
2D, 3D
SDNF
StruCad
SDNF
Structural for MicroStation TriForma
3D DGN
TriForma
CIS2 (1) To export in STEP or IGES format, you need to use the STEP IGES converter available in the Extranet: https://extranet.tekla.com/user_nf/ default.asp?root_id=13607&ala_id=14198&id=23097&mode=readdoc
7.2 Conversion files About conversion files
Conversion files map Tekla Structures profile and material names with names used in other software. Conversion files are simple text files, containing the Tekla Structures name in the first column, and the name used in the other software package in the second column. Columns are separated by a space. All parametric profiles must be entered in the profile conversion file. You can use the same conversion file both when importing and exporting models. You can specify the location of conversion files in most of the import and export tools.
•
If you leave the field blank, Tekla Structures looks for the conversion file defined by the variable XS_PROFDB, in Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > File Locations.
•
If you enter a conversion file name without a path, Tekla Structures searches for the file in the current model folder.
Tekla Structures includes several conversion files in the standard installation, and you can also create your own. See Creating conversion files (p. 173). Conversion files are located in the \environments\environment\profil folder. All conversion files have the extension cnv.
Converting twin profiles Tekla Structures also includes twin profile conversion files. Tekla Structures reads the twin profile conversion file before the profile conversion file, so you should include the profiles from the original model in the import.
172
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
The twin profile conversion file is a text file containing the profile prefix (characters only) and the distance between the profiles in mm, separated by a space character. Tekla Structures converts all profiles with the specified prefix to twin profiles. Example
The twin profile conversion file could for example be named to twin_profiles.cnv and it could contain lines like the one below: DL
20
Spacing
The distance between the profiles is the same for all the profiles with the same profile prefix. So for example the profiles with prefix DL will always have the same spacing. If you want different spacing values, then you need to use different profile prefix, too.
Also add to profile conversion
You also need to add the twin profile to the profile conversion file to get DL profile converted to L-profile in Tekla Structures: L200*20 DL200/20-20
Limitations
Additional information
•
Twin profile conversion cannot be used for profiles which start with a number. This means that you cannot define double angles as 2L. Instead, you need to use for example DL as the prefix for twin profile: DL200/20-20.
•
Twin profile conversion works only in CAD import, but not in FEM import.
Creating conversion files (p. 173) Locating conversion files (p. 173) Sample conversion files (p. 173) Troubleshooting (p. 174) Importing models (p. 175)
Creating conversion files You can also create your own conversion files. To create a new conversion file: 1. 2. 3.
Open an existing conversion file using any text editor (e.g. Wordpad). See Locating conversion files (p. 173). Use Save as to give the file a new name. Edit the file, entering profile names recognized by Tekla Structures in the first column, and the corresponding name recognized by the other software in the second column. See Sample conversion files (p. 173).
Locating conversion files Standard conversion files are located in the profil folder for the environment you are using (for example, \environments\usimp\profil). Tekla Structures searches for profile conversion files:
• •
In the current model folder Using the path indicated by the variable XS_PROFDB in Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > File Locations.
Sample conversion files Here are some sample conversion files for reference:
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
173
! Profile name conversion Tekla Structures -> SDNF ! ! If Converted-name does not exist, it will be the same ! as Tekla Structures-name. ! Tekla Structures-nameConverted-name C10X15.3C10X15.3 C10X20C10X20 C10X25C10X25 C10X30C10X30 C12X20.7C12X20.7 C12X25C12X25 C12X30C12X30 C15X33.9C15X33.9 C15X40C15X40 C15X50C15X50 C3X4.1 C3X4.1
! Profile name conversion Tekla Structures -> DSTV ! ! If Converted-name does not exist, it will be the same ! as Tekla Structures-name. ! Tekla Structures-name Converted-name C10X15.3 C10X20 C10X25 C10X30 C12X20.7 C12X25
C10X15.3 C10X20 C10X25 C10X30 C12X20.7 C12X25
Troubleshooting If you have problems importing a model, check the following:
• • • • Examples
Are there any error messages in the Tekla Structures log file? Is the input file located in the current model folder? Are there are blank material definitions (" ", empty quotation marks) in your input file? In your input file, see if profile position strings contain a space character (e.g. "Hand Rail" or "Thread 13").
Errors and corrections are highlighted in the following examples. Incorrect input file 00100782 4 0 2 "brace" "Tread 4" 1 "TREAD4.5" "" 0.000000 0 0 0.000000 1.000000 0.000000 16.250000 13.154267 3.857143 15.500000 13.154267 3.857143 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
174
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
Correct input file 00100782 4 0 2 "brace" "Tread_4" 1 "TREAD4.5" "A36" 0.000000 0 0 0.000000 1.000000 0.000000 16.250000 13.154267 3.857143 15.500000 13.154267 3.857143 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7.3 Importing models This section explains the basics of how to import a model created by a different system into Tekla Structures. It also contains details of the specific information you need to include for each type of import file. Topics
Import tools (p. 175) Overview of importing models (p. 175) Re-importing a model (p. 177) Creating reports of import (p. 179)
Import tools Use the following tools to import different file types into Tekla Structures:
• • • • • • • • • • • • •
Importing DWG/DXF files (p. 179) FEM import (p. 182) CAD import (p. 180) CIS import (p. 179) (CIMsteel) Steelfab import (p. 195) Fabtrol XML import (p. 196) S-Frame import (p. 196) MicasPlus import (p. 196) Eureka LPM import (p. 196) Model dump import (p. 186) ASCII import (p. 187) ASCII format description (p. 187) Attribute import (p. 191)
Overview of importing models These steps explain the basics of how to import a model into Tekla Structures. You will also need to refer to other sections for information specific to a particular import type. See also Import tools (p. 175). To import a model: 1. 2.
Open Tekla Structures and create a new model. Click File > Import.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
175
3.
Select any of the following options FEM, CIMSteel, CAD, or Other, to open the New import model dialog box.
4. 5.
6. 7. 8. 9.
Select the import type in the Type list box. See also Re-importing a model (p. 177). Enter a name for the import model in the Name field. The default name is import model. Tekla Structures uses the model name for revision control. For more information, see Revision control options (p. 178). Click Properties... to open a dialog box where you can define the settings for the import file type you selected. On the Parameters tab, enter a file name in the Input file field, or use the browse (...) button to set the path to the file. Enter values in the Origin fields if you want to import the file to a specific origin. Click OK to return to the New import model dialog box.
Finishing the import To complete the import: 1.
176
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
Click OK to open the Import models dialog box.
2. 3. 4.
Select the model to import. Click Import. Tekla Structures displays the Import model info dialog box. Select which version of parts to import.
5. 6.
Click Accept all. Tekla Structures prompts Do you want to save the import model for subsequent imports? Click Yes. Tekla Structures displays the import model in a model view.
7.
Re-importing a model If you need to re-import a model: Follow steps 1 to 4 in Overview of importing models (p. 175), but enter a new name in the Name field. If you use the same name as in the original import, Tekla Structures generates the warning Illegal name for import model. Tekla Structures uses this name to track revisions in the model. See also Revision control options (p. 178).
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
177
Revision control options You have the following options to specify the actions Tekla Structures takes when importing changed objects:
178
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
•
The left-hand column, Previous plan, lists the state of objects in your model, compared with the state of objects in the file to be imported. They can be New, Modified, Deleted, or Same.
•
Tekla Structures compares the state of objects being imported with those in your model. They can be Not in model, Different, or Same.
•
Use the list boxes in the rows under Not in model, Different, or Same to specify the actions to take when importing changed objects. The options are No action, Copy, Modify, or Delete.
You can only use Delete to delete objects that have been deleted from your model, not the imported model.
Creating reports of import Some of the import tools give you the option to create a report of the import. By default, Tekla Structures does not create reports when you import files. You specify the following information using the Report tab:
Field
Description
Create report
Select Yes to create a report of the imported model objects.
Display report
Select Yes to display the report file in the List dialog box.
Report template
Enter the path of the report template, or use the browse (...) button to locate it.
Report file name
Enter the path for the report file, or use the browse (...) button to locate it.
Importing DWG/DXF files The DWG/DXF import tools import 3D or 2D models, in DXF or DWG. You can import the file as parts and plates, or reference lines. To import DWG/DXF files, click File > Import > DWG/DXF.... You will need to include the following additional information about the import file:
•
Create:
•
Reference lines displays parts in the model using their reference lines in the original
model.
•
Parts displays the full profile of parts in the original model, based on the profile sizes in the Beam profile and Plate profile fields. You can only use metric profiles with
this option.
•
Check Use 2D import to import a two dimensional representation of the original model. This is useful when you use the reference line option. Leave Use 2D import blank to import the model in 3D.
CIS import See Overview of importing models (p. 175) for how to import the model into Tekla Structures.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
179
In the New import model dialog box, select CIS Analyse model import from the Type list box. Use the following fields on the Parameters tab to specify CIS information when importing files:
Field
Description
Model type
Analysis or Design model.
CIS version
Use to select the CIS version:
•
CIS/1 imports files compatible with the
CIMsteel LPM4DEP1 schema declaration.
•
CIS/2 imports files compatible with the
CIMsteel CIS/2 (STRUCTURAL_FRAME_SCHEMA) schema declaration.
ETABS
Combine members
Defines whether or not the elements of a single part in the CIS file are combined to form another part in Tekla Structures. For example, if a beam in a CIS file is divided into more than one element, and you select Yes, the elements are combined to form one beam in the model. Using No means every element of the beam in the CIS file forms a single beam in the model.
Max length for combining
Only applied if you select Yes in the Combine members list box. Defines the maximum length for combining the elements in the CIS file. Elements are combined into one part only if their combined length is less than this value.
Ignore offset
CIS/1 and CIS/2 analysis models can include member offsets (nodes are not exactly at the beam’s end points). With the default Yes, Tekla Structures uses these offsets to locate the physical members. With No, Tekla Structures determines the location using the node locations.
Ignore forces
Use to define how forces are imported. With No , Tekla Structures imports absolute values of maximum forces to parts’ user-defined attributes Shear, Tension and Moment. With Yes, Tekla Structures does not import forces.
To import from or export to ETABS software, you need to add two lines to the material conversion file for each Tekla Structures material grade. The first line is for exports, the second for imports. This example shows the lines needed for Tekla Structures material grade A36. A36 S\MAT\ASTM\GRADE36\ASTM_A36\1994 A36 steel_yield_strength_36.00
CAD import The CAD import tool supports several different formats to import models. See CAD import file types (p. 181).
180
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
Tekla Structures imports a maximum of 10,000 parts using this option. If the number of parts exceeds this, Tekla Structures displays a warning and does not import the model. In addition to following the steps in Overview of importing models (p. 175), you will need to include the following information about the import file:
CAD specific information Use the Plantview tab to select a material grade.
Creating log files In CAD import, the SDNF tab gives you the option to create a log file. If the import fails, examine the log file to find out why. The options in the Create log file list box are:
•
Create writes a new log file, and deletes the previous log file, each time you import the
model.
•
Append (default) adds the log information at the end of the existing log file.
You can also decide how the log file is displayed:
• • •
With an external viewer (e.g. Notepad). Not viewed. In a dialog box. (This creates a separate list dialog box in which the file can only be viewed.)
CAD import file types You can import the following file types into Tekla Structures, using the CAD import tool.
Option
Imports from
SDNF
Several different CAD systems. See SDNF specific options (p. 181).
Steel Detailing Neutral File Calma
Calma plant design system
HLI
IEZ AG Speedikon software
High Level Interface Plantview
Plantview design system
SDNF (PDMS)
Cadcentre 3D plant design software
Plant Design Management System XML
ArchiCAD modeling system
SDNF specific options The SDNF tab contains the following options for SDNF imports:
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
181
Field
Description
Part Pos_No
Enter a prefix and a start position number. Relates to Position number type below.
Apply cuts and fittings
Yes (default) applies cuts and fittings in the
import. Consider offsets
Use No (default) to position part creation points at part end points; Yes creates offsets.
SDNF log files
Creates the log file SDNF_import.log in the current model folder. See also Creating log files (p. 181).
Position number type
The SDNF file contains identifiers, which can be included in a part’s user-defined attributes, or as position numbers. You have the following options:
•
Part position
The identifier becomes the part’s position number. Do not use the Part Pos_No fields with this option.
•
Universal ID
The identifier becomes a user-defined attribute for the part. To make user-defined attributes visible, you need to add them to the objects.inp file. For more information on defining attributes in objects.inp, see Adding properties (p. 77).
If you want to import information, which Tekla Structures parts do not have, you can use the SDNF extension line in the SDNF file to be imported, and the REVISION_NUMBER user-defined attribute in Tekla Structures.
FEM import The FEM (Finite Element Method) import tool supports several formats and provides several options for importing models. See Overview of importing models (p. 175) for how to import the model into Tekla Structures. In the New import model dialog box, select FEM Import from the Type list box.
FEM specific information The FEM import formats are listed in the table below. You will need to include the following information for FEM imports:
• •
182
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
Use Part to enter the part position and start number for the model import. Use Assembly to enter the assembly position and start number for the model import.
•
To combine several elements in the FEM model into one part in Tekla Structures, set Combine members to Yes. For example, if a beam in an FEM model consists of more than one element, Tekla Structures combines the elements to form one beam in the Tekla Structures model. With the option NoTekla Structures creates a beam for each element in the FEM model.
•
Use Maximum length to define the maximum length for combining parts. Tekla Structures combines elements into one part only if their combined length is less than the value you enter here.
FEM import file types Use the following table to select the type of file to import:
File type
Use to import models created in
More information
DSTV
DSTV format
DSTV files (p. 183)
(Deutsche StahlbauVerband)
Yield stress in FEM import (p. 186)
SACS
SACS modeling and analysis software.
Yield stress in FEM import (p. 186)
S-Frame
S-Frame modeling and analysis software.
S-Frame import (p. 196)
Monorail
Monorail system
Staad
STAAD modeling and analysis system
STAAD files (p. 184)
Stan 3d
Stan 3d analysis software
Stan 3d files (p. 185)
Bus
BUS 2.5 analysis software
Bus import (p. 186)
(Structural Analysis And Design)
Only the options relevant to the selected type have any effect on the imported model.
DSTV files This FEM import tool imports models in the DSTV format. See basic information on FEM import (p. 182). Fill in the following information if you have selected the DSTV import type on the Parameters tab:
• •
On the DSTV tab, select the DSTV version to import. If the DSTV file to be imported contains a static and/or a CAD model, you can choose which one to import: Answering Yes to Import static elements imports the static model.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
183
Answering Yes to Import other elements imports the CAD model. For more information, see Model dump import (p. 186).
About DSTV There are three different sub-model types in DSTV:
•
Static models contain general data (profiles, materials, grid lines) and static data (model, restraints, results).
•
CAD models contain general data (profiles, materials, grid lines) and CAD data (elements, eccentricity).
•
NC3D model contains general data (profiles, materials, grid lines), CAD data (elements, eccentricity), and construction data (holes, chamfers).
Sub-models contain four different data levels:
Static data General data CAD data Construction data NC 3D model CAD model Static model Different programs produce different DSTV files. For example, the DSTV file produced by RSTAB static software only contains a static model. Tekla Structures exports either the static model (CROSS_SECTION), or the CAD model (MEMBER_LOCATION).
STAAD files This FEM import tool imports steel structures from the STAAD modeling and analysis system. See basic information on FEM import (p. 182). Fill in the following information if you have selected the Staad import type on the Parameters tab:
•
On the Staad tab, enter a material grade, or use the browse (...) button to locate a grade.
Tekla Structures supports the following STAAD table type specifications:
184
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
• • • • • • • • • •
ST (single section from the standard built-in tables) ST PIPE (parametric) ST TUBE (parametric) RA (single angle with reverse Y_Z axes) D (double channel) LD (long leg, double angle) SD (short leg, double angle) TC (beams with top cover plates) BC (beams with bottom cover plate) TB (beams with top and bottom cover plates)
You can import the types CM and T, user-provided steel table types (UPT), and other nonstandard profiles, if you have defined them in the profile conversion file. You must use the underline character in the STAAD name (e.g. UPT_1_W10X49). Tekla Structures automatically converts twin profiles in this import routine.
To make a STAAD input file compatible with the Tekla Structures STAAD import, in STAAD, use the option to save the input file using the option Joint coordinate format (Single). This creates a line for each coordinate in the input file.
Stan 3d files This FEM import tool imports steel structures from the Stan 3d analysis software. See basic information on FEM import (p. 182). Fill in the following information if you have selected the Stan 3d import type on the Parameters tab:
•
Before importing Stan 3d models, set the work plane orientation to global in Tekla Structures.
•
Define the profile conversion file (prfexp_stan_3d.cnv) in the Conversion tab. You have two options for mapping profile information:
•
Map section data (for example C1, FG, G1) to Tekla Structures profiles in the conversion file.
•
Add full profile information in the comment field in the Stan 3d model. Then map the comment to Tekla Structures profiles in the conversion file.
Tekla Structures looks at the comment field first. If it is empty or missing, Tekla Structures uses the section data.
• • •
On the Parts tab, enter the part position and start number for the model import. On the Stan 3d tab, enter the material for all imported members in the Material field. Specify the scale of the import model. You can import Stan 3d without specifying the scale, as long as both the Tekla Structures model and the import are in millimeters. If the Stan 3d file is in millimeters, use a scale of 1. If the Stan 3d file is in meters, use a scale of 1000.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
185
•
The default mapping for imports is:
• • •
Stan 3d’s Member Type to Tekla Structures’s Class. Stan 3d’s Section Name to Tekla Structures’s user-defined attribute Prelim mark.
Tekla Structures displays the number of parts not imported due to missing conversion information in the application window.
Bus import This FEM import tool imports basic steel structures from the BUS 2.5 analysis software input file. See basic information on FEM import (p. 182). On the Parameters tab, select the Bus import type, and then fill in the following information:
•
On the Conversion tab, enter the name of the profile and material conversion files (prf_expbus.cnv and mat_expbus.cnv) , or use the browse (...) button to locate them.
•
On the Parameters tab, enter the name of the input file (or use the browse (...) button to locate it), and the X, Y, and Z values.
•
On the Bus tab, enter the position number, material, name, and class of the parts to import. Use Beams behind plane to indicate the position of girders and cantilevers. The option Yes aligns the tops of all beams at the floor level.
Yield stress in FEM import The Default yield stress limit field is used for SACS import file. The Default material when yield stress < limit field is used for SACS import file. Define the material to use if yield stress is less than the limit.
•
Use the Default material when yield stress >= limit for SACS or DSTV import files. For SACS, this field defines the material to use if yield stress is greater than, or equal to, the limit.
•
For DSTV you can enter the material grade here, if it is not contained in the import file.
Model dump import The import model dump tool reads an ASCII file of a model dump to create a new model in Tekla Structures, including any views and drawings. When to use
If you have fatal problems with the model (e.g. cannot save the model, or cannot delete ghost parts), using a model dump is one way of saving your work.
Steps
To import a model dump: 1. 2. 3. 4.
186
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
Open Tekla Structures and create a new model. Copy the model dump file (e.g. model.dmp) from an existing model folder into the new model folder. Click File > Import > Model dump. Save and close the model, then reopen it to see the model.
You can only import a model dump into a newly-created model. A model dump can only be imported once into one model. You can import the same model dump into several new models. Do not use import model dumps in multi-user mode. See also Exporting a model dump (p. 217).
ASCII import This tool imports a model in ASCII format (American Standard Code for Information Interchange). Some plant design systems export ASCII files (e.g. ModelDraft, PDS, PDMS). Steps
To import an ASCII model: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
See also
Create a new model in Tekla Structures. Create a new 3D view. Copy the ASCII file into the model folder. Name the file import.asc. Select File > Import > ASCII. Tekla Structures displays the main members created from the ASCII file in the model.
ASCII format description (p. 187)
ASCII format description Profiles and polygon plates can be exported and imported using the ASCII format described in this section. Each part is described by 8 lines. These lines are repeated for each part to be transferred. Units are always in millimeters, blanks are used as separator. Below is an example of a beam part description: import.asc 4169 HEA300 1 290.000000 8.500000 300.000000 14.000000 300.000000 14.000000 A/6 BEAM S235JR S235JR 0.000000 16.500000 24000.000000 4855.000000 6000.000000 24000.000000 4855.000000 16.500000 24000.000000 5855.000000
The lines contain the following information:
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
187
188
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
Line
Description
Line 1
4169 HEA300 1 = ID PROFILE TYPE
• • •
ID 4169: Unique ID (integer). PROFILE HEA300: Profile name (string). TYPE 1: Profile type (integer)
The available profile types are:
•
0 = free cross section (can be used for special profiles which are not in the database)
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
1 = I profiles 2 = Welded hollow core profiles (HK, HQ) 3 = U profiles 4 = L profiles 5 = Round bars 6 = Round tubes 7 = Rectangular hollow core sections (RHS, P) 8 = T profiles 9 = Rectangular bars (FL, PL) 10 = Z profiles 11 = C profiles 12 = Omega profiles 13 = Sigma profiles 14 = Rail profile 16 = Reinforcement bars (DH)
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
189
Line
Description
Line 2
The contents of line 2 depend on the part profile:
•
Polygon plates:
N_POINTS COORDINATES. N_POINTS: For profiles of type 0. COORDINATES: Number of the corner points (integer). The X and Y coordinates of the plate corners (floating). Rotation direction is clockwise. Coordinates follow the global coordinate system. Z coordinates are taken from the center line in the plate thickness direction. Note: line 2 can be divided into several rows in the file.
•
Profiles:
For profile types 1-16, the line includes the physical dimensions of the cross section. HEIGHT S W1 T1 W2 T2: 290.000000 8.500000 300.000000 14.000000 300.000000 14.000000
• • • • • • Line 3
S 8.500000: Web thickness. W1 300.000000: Width of the upper flange. T1 14.000000: Thickness of the upper flange. W2 300.000000: Width of the lower flange. T2 14.000000: Thickness of the lower flange.
A/6 BEAM = MARK NAME
• • Line 4
HEIGHT 290.000000: Height of the cross section
MARK A/6: Position mark of the part (string). NAME BEAM: Part name (string).
S235JR S235JR = MATERIAL Material of the part (string).
Line 5
0.000000 = ROTATION Rotation angle (degrees) around the local x-axis of the beam.
Line 6
16.500000 24000.000000 4855.000000 = X1 Y1 Z1 Coordinates of the beam starting point. Z coordinates are center-line coordinates.
Line 7
6000.000000 24000.000000 4855.000000 = X2 Y2 Z2 Coordinates of the beam end point. Z-coordinates are centerline coordinates.
Line 8
16.500000 24000.000000 5855.000000 = X3 Y3 Z3 Direction vector showing the direction of the local z-axis.
190
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
Attribute import Use File > Import > Attributes to import user-defined attribute values into a model from a comma- or tab-delimited text file. For example, you might import a list of manufactured or checked assemblies. The file to import can be:
• • •
Exported from other software Created manually using a standard text editor A simple Tekla Structures report containing the part ID’s and user-defined attributes.
See About input files (p. 192) for more information on the import file. You can import user-defined attribute values into the entire model or drawing, or into a selected area of the model.
To save an Excel spreadsheet to a tab-delimited text file, use the Save As command in Excel.
Steps
To import user-defined attributes values: 1. 2. 3.
Copy the text file that you want to import into the model folder. If you only want to import user-defined attributes into a selected area of the Tekla Structures model, select an area in the model now. Click File > Import > Attributes to open the Import Attributes dialog box:
4. 5.
Click the Browse button next to the Input File field to locate the file to import. Select an option in the Input scope list box. The options are:
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
191
Option
Description
Default
Tekla Structures assigns the user-defined attribute values of objects in the input file to matching objects in the model.
Entire model Selection only
Tekla Structures only assigns the user-defined attribute values of objects in the input file to matching objects in the selected area of the model. Only use this option to import attributes into models. Do not use for drawings.
6.
Select an option in the Create log file list box. The options are:
Option
Description
Create
Creates a new log file named attribute_import.log in the current model folder each time you use File > Import > Attributes. This overwrites any previous attribute import log files.
Append
Adds log entries to the attribute_import.log file in the current model folder each time you use File > Import > Attributes. If the log file does not exist, Tekla Structures creates it.
No
Does not create a log file.
7.
Select an option in the Display log file list box. The options are:
Option
Description
No
Does not display the log file.
On dialog
Displays the log file in a separate window. Click an object ID in the log file to have Tekla Structures highlight the part in the model.
8.
Click Create to import the file.
About input files Input files are comma or tab-delimited text files. They contain the names and values of the user-defined attributes to import into the Tekla Structures model. In the input file, the column headings must contain the names of properties and user-defined attributes in model objects and drawings. The remaining rows contain the values of the properties and user-defined attributes. See Example input file for parts (p. 194).
The user-defined attributes you can include in an input file are defined in the file import_macro_data_types.dat. See Data types file (p. 194) for more information.
192
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
You must include at least one key field as a column heading. Key fields are drawing or model object properties. Tekla Structures uses these key fields to identify the model objects or drawings it will assign the user-defined attributes to. The key fields for model objects are:
Key field
Example
Action
ID
131
Tekla Structures assigns the user-defined attributes in this row in the input file to the model object that has an ID value of 131.
ASSEMBLY_POS
A3
Tekla Structures assigns the user-defined attributes in this row in the input file to the assembly that has an ASSEMBLY_POS value of A3
or MARK
Repeat this line for each assembly you want to include. 2
PHASE
Tekla Structures assigns the user-defined attributes in this row in the input file to the assembly that has a PHASE value of 2. You must also use ASSEMBLY_POS as a key field with this option.
The key fields for drawings are:
Key field
Example
Action
TYPE
A
Tekla Structures assigns the user-defined attributes in this row in the input file to the drawing that has a TYPE value of A and a MARK value of D4
NAME
D4
Use both key fields in the input file.
To have Tekla Structures ignore an entry in a row, replace the value with the word null. Leaving the entry blank will cause errors.
Example input file for drawings TYPE and NAME are the key fields in this input file. Tekla Structures adds a value for the userdefined attribute User field 4 to drawings with values that match those listed in the TYPE and NAME columns.
For example, a drawing with the TYPE A (assembly drawing) and NAME B.2 gets the value 4 in the User field 4.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
193
attributes.txt TYPE A A A A
NAME B.1 B.2 C.1 C.2
DRAWING_USERFIELD_4 3 4 1 2
Example input file for parts ASSEMBLY_POS and PHASE are the key field in this input file. Tekla Structures adds several
user-defined attributes to the assemblies with values that match those listed in the ASSEMBLY_POS and PHASE columns. For example, an assembly with the ASSEMBLY_POS
(assembly number) of B5 in phase 1 gets the following user-defined attributes:
• • •
STATUS: 3 USER_PHASE: 6 USER_ISSUE: 3/25/2003
attributes.txt ASSEMBLY_POS
PHASE
STATUS
USER_PHASE
USER_ISSUE
B1
1
7
3
3/25/2003
B2
1
7
3
3/25/2003
B3
1
7
3
3/25/2003
B4
1
7
3
3/25/2003
B5
1
3
6
3/25/2003
B1
1
3
5
3/26/2003
B2
2
3
4
3/26/2003
This input file contains repeat entries for B1. In this case, Tekla Structures writes the message Duplicate entry in input file in the log file and does not overwrite user-defined attributes that occur earlier in the file with those that occur later. For example, at the end of the attribute import, B1 will have the following user-defined attributes:
• • •
STATUS: 7 USER_PHASE: 3 USER_ISSUE: 3/25/2003
This input file is tab-delimited. You can also use a comma as the delimiter.
Data types file The ..\environments\*your environment*\system\import_macro_data_types.dat file is a simple text file listing the user-defined attributes that you can include in an input file. Edit the file using any standard text editor. You can:
• •
Change any of the user-defined attributes that are not key fields Add user-defined attributes as STRING, INT, FLOAT, or DATE variable types
The file contains the following columns, separated by commas or tabs:
194
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
VARIABLE_NAME, VARIABLE_TYPE, CONVERSION_FACTOR, COMMENT
Tekla Structures uses CONVERSION_FACTOR to convert imperial values to metric. Tekla Structures only uses this value in Imperial environments. We recommend that you check the FLOAT values to avoid conversion factor errors. Tekla Structures treats rows starting with double forward slash characters // as comments and ignores them when reading the file. Here is a sample section of the import_macro_data_types.dat file:
Variable name Variable type Conversion factor Comment Comment
Steelfab import See Overview of importing models (p. 175) for how to import the model into Tekla Structures. In the New import model dialog box, select SteelFab/SCIA Import from the Type list box.
Steelfab specific information In the SteelFab/SCIA import dialog box:
• • •
Set Import weldings to Yes to include welds in the model. Set Import holes to Yes to include holes in the model. Enter the path, file name, and file extension of the import file in the ASCII file name field. If it is blank, Tekla Structures looks in the current model folder.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
195
Fabtrol XML import To import the fabrication status information of parts from a Fabtrol XML file into a Tekla Structures model: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Click File > Import > Fabtrol XML.... Click the browse button (...) to locate the file for the Input file field. Select the required items on the Create log file and Display log file list boxes depending whether you want to create and display the log file. Click Create to import the status information.
S-Frame import Import analysis models created by the FASTSOLVE suite of programs, so you can detail them in Tekla Structures. See Overview of importing models (p. 175) for how to import the model into Tekla Structures. In the New import model dialog box, select Import S-Frame from the Type list box.
About S-Frame imports The S-Frame model is used for analysis, so may not contain all the information necessary to create an accurate Tekla Structures model, particularly for positioning parts. Check the imported model carefully before you start detailing.
MicasPlus import See Overview of importing models (p. 175) for how to import the model into Tekla Structures. In the New import model dialog box, select Import MicasPlus from the Type list box.
MicasPlus specific information In the Import MicasPlus dialog box, select Front or Top from the Part rotation list box.
Eureka LPM import Eureka LPM (Logical Product Model) uses the CIMsteel (Computer Integrated Manufacturing) data exchange format. See Overview of importing models (p. 175) for how to import the model into Tekla Structures. In the New import model dialog box, select Import Eureka LPM from the Type list box.
Overview of ELiPLAN import and export Description
Elematic ELiPLAN is a software for resource planning, scheduling, and management for precast concrete fabricators. Using the export and import features in Tekla Structures you can automate the data transfer between these two applications. The data transfer consists of the following actions: 1.
196
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
Exporting ELiPLAN data file from Tekla Structures
2. 3. 4.
Importing ELiPLAN data file into ELiPLAN Exporting ELiPLAN status data file from Eliplan Importing ELiPLAN status data file into Tekla Structures
The ELiPLAN import (2) supports incremental approach, which means that ELiPLAN is able to create, update, and delete parts in it's database. This means that precast detailers can export the most up-to-date data files whenever the Tekla Structures model has been changed. Similar incremental support is included in the Tekla import (4). To keep the status and schedule data in Tekla Structures model up-to-date, we recommend you to update the status data regularly. See also
Exporting ELiPLAN (p. 244) Import ELiPLAN status data
Import ELiPLAN status data Importing status and scheduling information
If you have a status data file created in ELiPLAN, you can then import it into your Tekla Structures model with theImport Eliplan status data (69) component. For more information on transferring data between Tekla Structures and ELiPLAN, see Overview of ELiPLAN import and export (p. 196).
The format and contents of this file are completely different than those in the file that is exported from Tekla Structures to ELiPLAN.
To import status and scheduling information from ELiPLAN to Tekla Structures: 1. 2. 3.
Press Ctrl + F to open the component catalog. Type in Eliplan and click Search. Double-click Import data from EliPlan to open the following dialog box:
4.
Select the status data file to import. When you click the Create button, Tekla Structures updates the status and schedule data for parts in the Tekla Structures model. When the data is read, Tekla Structures shows the log file in the list:
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
197
The list contains the parts whose data is updated correctly and also provides information on possible problems that may have occurred. When you select an item in the list, Tekla Structures automatically selects the corresponding part in the model. The overall status information is shown at the end of the list. Tekla Structures stores the actual status data to the user-defined attributes of the parts. To view the data, open the user-defined attributes from the part properties dialog box.
The ELiPLAN-specific user-defined attributes are not in the default environment of Tekla Structures. You need to modify the objects.inp to use and view them. For more information, see Configuration for ELiPLAN export.
198
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
7.4 Exporting files Tekla Structures exports models in several formats. This section explains how to export models and drawings from Tekla Structures. Most of the export tools are available on the pull-down menu File > Export.
You can also export drawings from the drawing list, click Drawings & Reports >Drawing List.... Also, you can export your model to a web page using the command File > Publish as Web page... to make it available on the Internet, using a web browser. For more information, see Tekla WebViewer (p. 251). Topics
Exporting 3D DWG/DXF (p. 199) Exporting 3D DGN (p. 201) Exporting drawings (p. 246) Exporting FEM (p. 202) Exporting CIMsteel (p. 204) Exporting CAD (p. 208) Exporting MIS (p. 212) Exporting ASCII (p. 214) Exporting IFC (p. 214) Exporting a model dump (p. 217)
Exporting 3D DWG/DXF You can export models as a 3D DWG or 3D DXF file type to use in other modeling or analysis programs. By default, Tekla Structures creates the model.dwg file in the current model folder. To create a 3D DWG/DXF export file: 1. 2.
Open a Tekla Structures model. Select File > Export > 3D DWG/DXF... to open the following dialog box.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
199
3. 4. 5. 6.
Modify the export options as required. Accept the default file name, or use Browse... to navigate to another file. Select whether to export as DWG or as DXF. To export the model, click:
• • 7.
Export all to export the whole model, or Export selected to export selected parts from the model.
Tekla Structures creates the export file in the current model folder.
Export as Following options are available:
Export as
Description
Faces
Exports parts as faces.
Lines
Exports parts as lines located in the center of profile cross section. Used when exporting to analysis software.
Reference lines
Exports parts as reference lines, drawn between the creation points. Used when exporting to analysis software.
Exporting 3D DWG or DXF files as Faces uses more memory and may take longer, but the end result is better. If the model is large, or you have less memory to use, Export asReference lines option is faster, and the resulting file size is smaller. Use the Faces option to change part and bolt accuracy, and select whether or not to export cuts and inner contours.
200
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
Field
Option
Type
Normal
Description
High
Also exports chamfers in profile crosssections.
High
Exports the entire bolt assemblies, including washers.
Normal
Only exports the bolt and nut.
No bolts
Exports no bolts.
Cuts
Yes
Exports cuts.
Inner contours
Yes
Exports radiused corners in cuts.
Bolt accuracy
None of these options exports bolt holes. Curved beams and polybeams are exported as single, continuous beams. The number of segments in the curved beams is as defined in the curved beam. For more information see Creating a curved beam. The ID of each part is exported as an attribute and written into the export file for each part.
Exporting 3D DGN The 3D DGN export tool creates a model.dgn file in the current model folder, which you can import into other modeling systems. Follow these steps to export a 3D DGN file: 1. 2. 3.
Open a Tekla Structures model. Select the objects in the model to export. Click File > Export > 3D DGN... to open the Export 3D DGN dialog box.
Enter the name of the export file, or click Browse... to locate it. Click Export all, or Export selected to export the selected parts. 4. Settings
Tekla Structures creates the model.dgn file in your current model folder.
You can also use the following variables to control DGN exports:
• •
XS_DGN_EXPORT_PART_AS XS_EXPORT_DGN_COORDINATE_SCALE
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
201
• • •
XS_EXPORT_DGN_FILENAME XS_EXPORT_DGN_INCLUDE_CUTS XS_EXPORT_DGN_INCLUDE_INNER_CONTOUR
Exporting FEM There are several options for exporting a model with the FEM (Finite Element Method) export tool. To create a FEM export: 1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6.
Open a Tekla Structures model. Click File > Export > FEM.... The FEM export dialog box appears. Click the Conversion tab and enter the path to the required conversion files. For more information about conversion files, see Conversion files (p. 172). Click the Parameters tab.
In the Output file field, accept the default, or use the browse (...) button to select another output file. Select an output file type:
• • • 7. 8.
DSTV MicroSAS Staad
Select the parts in the model to export. Click Apply and then Create.
Tekla Structures creates the export file in the current model folder.
Combine segments (MicroSAS) Combine segmented members (MicroSAS) gives you the option to combine multiple parts to
form one part in the exported model. For example, if you have divided a beam into several elements and select the Yes option, Tekla Structures combines the elements so that they form one beam in the exported model. With the option No every element of the beam in the model forms individual beams.
STAAD The options on the Staad tab are only relevant to Staad file types in the FEM export.
202
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
Parametric shapes when possible defines how Tekla Structures exports the profiles PL, P, D, PD, SPD to Staad. Yes exports the profiles as parametric shapes so that STAAD can identify them correctly. No exports all profiles as standard STAAD shapes. Example
Example of a plate PL10*200
•
Exported as parametric shape (Yes): 13 PRI YD 200.000000 ZD 10.000000
•
Exported as a standard shape (No): 13 TABLE ST PL10*200
If a profile is not defined on the Staad tab, Tekla Structures cannot identify it, and so does not import it.
DSTV The options on the DSTV tab only relate to DSTV file types in FEM export.
Select a DSTV version to export: Element reference with
Tekla Structures exports either a static model CROSS_SECTION, or a CAD model MEMBER_LOCATION. The DSTV entities are listed below. Tekla Structures supports those marked (*). See the DSTV standard "Stahlbau - Teil 1. März 2000" for more information. Static data:
• • • • • •
vertex (*) polyline substructure (*) node (*) element (*) element_eccentricity (*)
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
203
• • • • •
raster boundary_condition elastic_support nodal_reaction element_reaction
General data:
• •
material (*) cross_section (*)
CAD data:
• • • • •
member (*) member_location (*) construction-data cutout hole
Exporting CIMsteel You have the following options when exporting a CIMsteel model:
• •
Analysis model (p. 204) Manufacturing model (p. 205)
Analysis model To export a CIMsteel analysis model: 1. 2.
204
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
Open a Tekla Structures model. Click File > Export > CIMSteel > Analysis model.
Use the option CIS to select the CIS (CIMsteel Intergration Standard) version.
3. 4. 5.
•
CIS/1 generates a file that is compatible with the CIMsteel LPM4DEP1 schema declaration.
•
CIS/2 generates a file compatible with the CIMSteel CIS/2 (STRUCTURAL_FRAME_SCHEMA) schema declaration.
Enter the path and name for the export file in the Step file field or accept the default. If you do not enter a path, Tekla Structures creates the export file in the current model folder. If required, enter the a name and organization to identify who created the export file. Select one of the following standards (Flavor) to apply to the export:
• • • 6.
UK EUROPEAN US
Set units to metric or imperial.
Imperial is only available for CIS/2. CIS/1 is always exported in metric
units.
7. 8.
Enter values for the origin of the exported model. The origin comes from the origin in Tekla Structures. To split a part in the Tekla Structures model into several elements in a CIMsteel model, select Split members (Yes). As an example, three columns are connected to a beam in a model, so that one column is in the middle and the others are at each end of the beam. With the Yes option the beam is split into two equal elements in the CIMsteel model. With the No option there will be one beam, a single linear element, and two nodes (a node at each end), in the CIMsteel model.
9.
Select the parts in the model to export, then click Apply and Create.
Manufacturing model Follow these steps to export a CIS2 CIMsteel manufacturing model: 1. 2.
3. 4.
Open a Tekla Structures model. If you want to include information on drawings and NC files in the export file, you need to
•
Export or print needed drawings to the model folder in dwg format. See Exporting drawings (p. 246) or Printing to file.
•
Create single-part drawings, and then create NC files with the extension .nc1. See DSTV (p. 159).
Click File > Export > CIMSteel > Manufacturing model to export a model that contains all of the parts needed for manufacture and erection. Click the Parameters tab.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
205
5. 6.
Enter a name for the export file in the Output file field. CIS uses the file extension stp. Set Linear units to metric or imperial units (only for CIS/2 format).
With Imperial units Tekla Structures writes all of the designations for nuts, bolts, and washers in fractional inches.
7. 8. 9.
If required, enter a name for the structure in the Structure name field. Enter the path to the profile conversion file. For more information, see More CIMsteel information (p. 206). Enter the path to the material conversion file. For more information, see Import and export.
If you leave the profile and material conversion file paths empty, Tekla Structures uses the conversion files in the current profile folder for the conversion.
10. To include information on NC files in an export, set Include NC files to Yes and specify a path (relative to the current model folder) to the folder where the NC files are located. 11. To export globally unique ID’s instead of internal ID numbers, select Yes in the Export Globally unique ID’s list box. 12. Click the Profile standard tab to enter information about the standard. 13. Select the parts in the model to export. 14. Click Apply and then Create. Tekla Structures creates the export file in your current model folder.
More CIMsteel information Profile conversion
206
This example shows part of the profile conversion file prfexp_cis.cnv:
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
! ! ! ! !
US Imperial Flavor Profile name conversion Tekla Structures -> CIS If Converted-name does not exist, it will be the same as Tekla Structures-name.
! Tekla Structures-name
Converted-name
! !American Sections - Imperial !W - Wide Flange Beams W44X335 S\SECT\US\W44X335\ASTM_A6\1994 W44X290 S\SECT\US\W44X290\ASTM_A6\1994 W44X262 S\SECT\US\W44X262\ASTM_A6\1994 Converted-name contains the following information, each value separated by a back slash ‘\’:
• • • • • •
S (fixed value) SECT (fixed value) Name of the standardization organization Standard name of the profile shape Name of the standard Year of the standard
If the conversion file does not contain the relevant profile type, the Tekla Structures name of the profile is used. Tekla Structures also uses the Standardization organization, Standard name and Year of standard defaults on the Profile standard tab. Material conversion
This example shows part of the material conversion file matexp_cis.cnv:
! ! ! ! !
US Imperial Flavor Material name conversion Tekla Structures -> CIS If Converted-name does not exist, it will be the same as Tekla Structures-name.
! Tekla Structures-name
Converted-name
# Carbon Structural Steel (ASTM_A36\1994) GRADE32 S\MAT\US\GRADE32\ASTM_A36-94\1994 GRADE36 S\MAT\US\GRADE36\ASTM_A36-94\1994 #High Strength Carbon Manganese Steel (ASTM_A529\1994 GRADE42 S\MAT\US\GRADE42\ASTM_A529-94A\1994) Converted-name contains the following information, each item separated by the backslash
character (\):
• • • • • •
S (fixed value) MAT (fixed value) Name of the standards organization Standard name of the material Name of the standard Year of the standard
Converted-name contains the following information about bolts, nuts, and washers, separated by two colon characters (::):
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
207
• • • •
Name of the standards organization Name of the standard Year of the standard Standard name of the bolt, washer, or nut
Tekla Structures names for bolts, washers, and nuts are constructed from their fastener standard, fastener type and size. If the conversion file does not contain an equivalent profile name, Tekla Structures uses the name of the material. Tekla Structures takes the following default values from the Material standard and Bolt standard tabs for materials, bolts, nuts and washers:
Field
Description
Standardization organization
The organization that published the standard.
Name of standard
The name or number of the standard.
If this field is blank, Tekla Structures places an empty entry ("") in CIS/2 files. If this field is blank, Tekla Structures places an empty entry ("") in CIS/2 files.
Year of standard
The year the standard was published. If the field is left blank, Tekla Structures uses 1999 as the default value.
Exporting CAD You can export a CAD model in several formats. To export a CAD model: 1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6.
208
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
Open a Tekla Structures model. Click File > Export > CAD... to open the CAD export dialog box. Click the Conversion tab and enter path to the required conversion files. For more information about conversion files, see Conversion files (p. 172). Click the Parameters tab.
In the Output file field, accept the default, use the browse (...) button to select another output file. Select one of the output formats in the Type list box:
Format
Description
PML
PML exports files in Intergraph’s Parametric Modeling Language format. The PML export can be used with several Intergraph systems.
HLI
HLI (High Level Interface) option is used for exporting data to IEZ AG’s Speedikon software.
SCIA
SCIA is used for SteelFab interface.
Calma
Calma option is used for exporting data to the Calma
plant design system. SDNF (Steel Detailing Neutral File) option is used to
SDNF
export models for use in several different CAD systems. PDMS
PDMS (Plant Design Management System) option is used to export models for use with the Cadcentre’s 3d plant design software. For more information, see PDMS (p. 212).
SDNF (PDMS)
SDNF (PDMS) is used for exporting information to PDMS via SDNF link. Tekla Structures writes the information of finish field in the member class attribute, whereas in SDNF export it omits the class information.
XML
XML is used for exporting information to ArchiCAD modeling system. There are some limitations in the export:
• • 7. 8. 9.
Conversion files are not used. Holes, bolts and welds are not exported.
Use the Origin X, Y, Z fields to specify the origin of the exported model. Select the parts in the model to export. Click Apply and then Create.
Tekla Structures then creates the export file in your current model folder.
PML For PML output format, use the following options on the PML tab.
• •
Select the units for the export model. Export cut parts controls whether cuts are included in the export. Select Yes to export
part cuts.
When you export models from Tekla Structures into an other software using PML, enter the Tekla Structures profile names in the conversion file. This makes the other software consider parts as beams and columns (not as plates), and reduces the export file size. The following variables control PML export:
• •
PML_ASSEMBLY_MARKS_IN_USE PML_CARDINAL_POINT_NOT_IN_USE
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
209
SDNF For SDNF, SDNF(PDMS), or PDMS output formats, use the following options on the SDNF tab:
210
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
Field
Description
SDNF version number
Select the SDNF version to be used in the export.
Apply cuts and fittings
Select Yes (default) applies cuts and fittings in the export.
Field
Description
Position number type
The SDNF file contains identifiers, which can be included in a part’s user-defined attributes, or as position numbers. You have the following options:
•
Part position
The identifier becomes the part’s position number. Do not use the Part Pos_No fields with this option.
•
Assembly position
The identifier becomes the assembly’s position number.
•
Universal ID
The identifier becomes a user-defined attribute for the part. To make user-defined attributes visible, you need to add them to the objects.inp file. For more information on defining attributes in objects.inp, see Adding properties (p. 77). Consider offsets
To ignore the offset records during export, select No, and to take them into account, select Yes. This setting does not affect the actual start and end point information, only the offset. Tekla Structures writes the start and end points based on the actual solid, not on the reference line.
PDMS phase offset
PDMS phase offset defines phase offset for exported parts.
For example, if the first phase in Tekla Structures model is 1 and you enter 10 for phase offset, the Tekla Structures parts in another software get the phase 11 and up. Engineering Firm
Enter the name of the engineering firm.
Client
Enter the name of the client.
Structure ID
Enter a unique identification number for the exported model.
Project ID
Enter a unique identification number for the exported project.
Revision Number
Enter a revision number (optional). Tekla Structures takes the revision number from the user-defined attributes (REVISION_NUMBER) of the model. If this field is blank, Tekla Structures uses a revision number from the CAD export dialog box (Revision Number).
Issue Code
Tekla Structures writes the issue code in the header section of the output file. For PDMS, this value should always be "Tekla Structures".
Design Code
Define the design code to be used in structural design. For more information, see Design codes and methods.
XML For XML output formats, use the following options on the XML tab:
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
211
•
Use Units to specify unit conversions. For example, for a Tekla Structures model created using millimeters, select IN to convert all part dimensions to inches in the output file.
•
XML structure ID is a unique identification number for the exported model. You must always enter an identification number. Tekla Structures uses this value to identify the model if you re-export it.
PDMS Tekla Structures uses some of the information you enter on the SDNF tab. It supports two different PDMS export formats, EXTRUSION and NOZZLE. Tekla Structures decides which export format to use by searching for the Tekla Structures profile name in the profile conversion file (by default, prfexp_pdms.cnv). If the profile is not there, Tekla Structures exports the part in both EXTRUSION and NOZZLE formats.
When you add a profile to the NOZZLE catalog, you must also add it to the profile conversion file.
Using EXTRUSION elements
EXTRUSION transfers data from Tekla Structures to PDMS using EXTRUSION elements. Tekla Structures describes profiles in the export file using the vertices of the profiles. So you can also export contour plates and folded plates. Tekla Structures exports profiles as solids, which may not be suitable for some profile types (e.g. tubes).
Loading a NOZZLE catalog
You can also transfer data from Tekla Structures to PDMS by loading a NOZZLE catalog into a PDMS project. The NOZZLE catalog is contained in the file load_nozz_cata.mac, located in the European profile folder. This file describes the profiles you can export to PDMS systems. It also enables Tekla Structures to use NOZZLE elements. This format creates exact profiles (even for tube profiles), and a smaller export file than the EXTRUSION option. You can edit the NOZZLE catalog with a text editor to add profiles to it.
Exporting MIS Use the MIS (Manufacturing Information System) tool to create list files. You can create them from selected parts, or from all the parts in the model. The MIS command creates the following file types: DSTV, KISS, EJE, EPC, or Steel 2000. To create an MIS list file: 1. 2.
212
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
Open the Tekla Structures model to export. Click File > Export > MIS... to display the MIS dialog box.
3. 4.
5.
In the MIS type list box, select the file type. See MIS types (p. 213). In the MIS list file field, enter the name of the list file, including the file extension. You need to use specific file extensions for some file types. See MIS list file (p. 214) for a list of file extensions. Click Create all or Create selected. Tekla Structures creates the MIS file in the current model folder.
MIS types The file types you can use for MIS output are:
•
DSTV
The file only contains the MIS information for the DSTV model.
•
Fabtrol/KISS
Gives you the following additional options:
• • •
Customer name Full material list. Check this box to add labor-related information to the list (holes, welds, cambers, preliminary marks, etc.).
EJE
US Imperial version only.
Structural Material Manager internally stores all dimensions in sixteenths. Its External Data Interface writes all dimensions, such as widths, lengths, etc, except for Beam and Channel descriptions, in sixteenths of an inch. As an example the length 12'-8 7/8 is equivalent to 2446 sixteenths, which is calculated as (feet x 192) + (inches x 16) + sixteenths.
•
EPC
The EPC (Estimating and Production Control) module of SDS/2 requires multinumbering to be active.
•
Steel 2000
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
213
MIS list file Use the following MIS list file extensions, according to which file type you are creating:
Type
File extension
DSTV
xsr
Fabtrol/KISS
kss
EJE
eje
EPC
None
Steel 2000
None
Exporting ASCII To export an ASCII file of a model: 1. 2. 3. See also
Open the Tekla Structures model you want to export. Select the parts of the model you want to export. Click File > Export > ASCII. Tekla Structures creates the model.asc file in the current model folder.
ASCII format description (p. 187)
Exporting IFC You can export the basic parts of a Tekla Structures model into IFC2X, IFC2X2, IFC2X3 and IFC2X3_mapping schema edition files. Topics
• • •
Defining the resulting IFC entity for the exported model objects (p. 214) Exporting a Tekla Structures model into an IFC file (p. 216) Exporting user-defined and template attributes as property sets into IFC models (p. 217)
Defining the resulting IFC entity for the exported model objects To define the resulting IFC entity for the exported model objects, use the user-defined attributes: Usage
1.
Double-click the part to open the part properties dialog box, and click User-defined attributes... button.
2.
214
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
On the IFC export tab, define the resulting IFC entity for the exported model object:
Property
Option
Description
IFC entity
Auto
The object is exported as default entity. See a list of default settings below.
None
The object is not exported.
IfcBeam
Supported IFC entities.
IfcColumn IfcWall IfcWallStandardCase IfcBuildingElementP art IfcSlab IfcPlate IfcFooting IfcPile IfcRailing
IfcBuildingElementPr oxy IfcMember IFC export type
BREP
Brep presentation is used for all objects.
AUTO
Constructive solid geometry is used when possible, and brep presentation is used otherwise. Enter the site, building and building storey name.
IFC site name IFC building name
With these fields you can divide the parts to different sites, buildings and building storeys.
IFC building storey name
If you leave the fields empty, the site, building, and building storey name remain undefined in the IFC file. IFC entity attribute set as Auto:
Tekla Structures object
IFC entity exported
Beam
IfcBeam
Twin profile
2x IfcBeam
Column
IfcColumn
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
215
Defining the color of the exported objects
Tekla Structures object
IFC entity exported
Slab
IfcSlab
Concrete Panel
IfcWallStandardCase
Pad footing
IfcFooting
Strip footing
IfcFooting
Contour plate
IfcPlate
3.
Click the OK button in the user-defined attributes dialog box.
4.
Click the OK button in the part properties dialog box.
5.
Export the model object. For more information see Exporting a Tekla Structures model into an IFC file (p. 216) .
The color of the exported objects is defined according to the class definition, in the following manner:
Class definition
Color
1
Grey
2
Red
3
Green
4
Dark blue
5
Cyan
6
Yellow
7
Dark magenta
8
Dark grey
9
Dark red
10
Dark green
11
Dark cyan
12
Magenta
13
Orange
14
Blue
Exporting a Tekla Structures model into an IFC file To export a Tekla Structures model into an IFC file: Usage
1.
Select the model objects to export.
2.
Click File > Export > IFC...
3.
Select the schema edition to be used in the export from the options in the Schema edition list box.
4.
Browse for the Output file location and enter the file name. The file extension for the output file is .ifc.
The length of the file path is limited to 256 characters.
216
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
5.
Set other export properties if needed:
•
Export type: Select Coordination view (old AUTO) to use extrusion solid graphics and parametric profiles or Presentation view to use boundary representation
graphics and no parametric profiles in the export.
6.
•
XML format: Select whether or not to export the file in XML format. If you select Yes, the file format of the exported file is .ifcxml.
•
Compression: Select whether or not to compress the export file. If you select Yes, the file format of the exported file is .ifz.
Click Create.
Limitations
The following model parts are not supported in the export:
• • • •
Welds Reinforcing bars Surface treatments Grids
Exporting user-defined and template attributes as property sets into IFC models You can export user-defined and template attributes as property sets into IFC models. You can also create multiple sets and name the sets as required. To do this: Usage
1.
2.
Search for the attributes you want to export in the following files:
•
User-defined attributes in the file objects.inp, located in the folder ..\TeklaStructures\14.1\environments\ \inp
•
Template attributes in the file contentattributes_global.lst, located in the folder ..\TeklaStructures\14.1\environments\ \template\settings
Open the file IFC_properties_sets.inp located in the folder ..\TeklaStructures\14.0\environments\countryindependent\inp by using any standard text editor. This file defines which attributes are exported and in what format they are exported. Possible formats are STRING, INTEGER, FLOAT and DATE. All attributes with the same property set name will be joined to the same property set.
3.
Enter the property sets to be exported in the file using the following syntax:
An example of a possible property set would be: My_property_set_name My_property_name USER_FIELD_1 STRING
Exporting a model dump A model dump creates an ASCII file of a model that you can use in other models. To export a model dump file:
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
217
1. 2.
Open the Tekla Structures model to export. Click File > Export > Model dump.
Tekla Structures creates the model.dmp file in the current model folder.
The model dump file contains the entire model, including views and drawings.
See also Model dump import (p. 186).
Exporting BVBS Description
This component exports the geometry of reinforcements into BVBS (Bundesvereinigung Bausoftware) format. The result is a text file in ASCII format. The supported versions of the BVBS format are:
• •
1.0 year 1995 2.0 year 2000
The component is able to export bent reinforcing bars, reinforcing bar groups and polygonal or rectangle not-bent meshes. The export of the hooks is also supported. Limitations
Each point of unbent reinforcement must lie on the same plane (BF3D export is not supported).
Example 1
Exporting reinforcements with standard bending radius:
218
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
BF2D@Hj57@r0@ia@p1@l922@[email protected]@d12@gA500HW@s30@v@Gl375@w90@l547@w0@ C85@ Example 2
Exporting reinforcements with non-standard bending radius:
BF2D@Hj57@r0@ia@p1@l831@[email protected]@d12@gA500HW@s30@v@Gl163@w0@r200@w90@ l335@w0@C84@ See also
Exporting reinforcement to BVBS format (p. 220)
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
219
Export rebar BVBS (78) dialog box (p. 220) BVBS (78) specification (p. 222)
Exporting reinforcement to BVBS format To export the geometry of the selected reinforcement to the BVBS format, follow the steps below. Preconditions
If you create a new reinforcement in an actual model, you need to close and re-open the export dialog box.
Usage
1.
Select the reinforcing bars to export.
2.
Click Ctrl + F to open the component catalog. Type in BVBS and click Search. Doubleclick Export rebar BVBS (78) to open the component dialog box.
3.
Set the following options in the Export rebar BVBS (78) dialog box: a Set Selection to Selected rebars only. b
Set Standard bending radius to Use Tekla standards.
c
Set Draw rebars to Yes to see the exported geometry in the model after exporting.
4.
Click Create.
5.
Check the exported geometry.
6.
Find the name of the exported file in the component output window.
7.
Check the created file in the current model folder.
Result
Using this component creates one output file. The output file is created in the current model folder. The file name depends on the settings in the dialog box and it is shown in the console output window (see the picture). The existing files are rewritten. To check the exported geometry, set Draw rebars to Yes.
See also
Export rebar BVBS (78) dialog box (p. 220) BVBS (78) specification (p. 222)
Export rebar BVBS (78) dialog box This section describes the fields in the Export rebar BVBS (78) dialog box.
220
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
Configuration
Field
Description
File name
Specify the name of the output file. The default file name is Project Number.
Ext file name
Specify the extension of the output file. The default file extension is txt.
Version
Specify the version of the BVBS format. The supported versions of BVBS are: 1.0 year 1995 2.0 year 2000
Selection
Define which reinforcements will be exported.
•
All rebars in the model no preselected parts are
required, all reinforcements from the current model are exported.
•
Selected rebars only only the selected
reinforcements are exported.
•
All rebars of selected concrete elements only
reinforcements that belong to the selected concrete parts are exported. 2D rebars
Export single reinforcing bars and groups consisting of straight bars.
3D rebars
Export bent reinforcing bars. Not supported at the moment.
Spiral rebars
Export spiral reinforcements. Not supported at the moment.
Not bent meshes
Export unbent meshes. Polygonal and rectangle meshes are supported.
Bent meshes
Export bent meshes. Not supported at the moment.
Standard bending radius
Specify the value of the standard bending radius.
•
Use Tekla standards: Each material and diameter has its own initial bending radius in Tekla Structures. These values are used for each reinforcing bar group from the file \environments\*your_environment*\ profil\rebar_database.inp (Column “Min bend rad”). These values are used for the standard bending radius.
•
Use radius coef: the standard bending radius is the bending radius of the exported reinforcing bars multiplied with Radius coef.
•
Use rebar radius: the bending radius of exported
reinforcing bars is used as the standard bending radius. Radius coef
Define the number used for the computation of the standard bending radius. Entire number is required. Used only if Standard bending radius is set to Radius coef.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
221
Field
Description
Draw rebars
Draw the exported geometry in the model. It is represented by the lines created inside reinforcements (straight bars and meshes) or on the side of reinforcements (bent bars). In case of 180° hooks, the hook line is inside the main line.
Ignored classes
List of classes. Reinforcements with classes in this list will not be exported. E. g. “5 7 17”.
BVBS (78) specification Each exported reinforcing bar or group of the same reinforcing bars has one row in the exported file. One row consists of a HEADER block, a GEOMETRY block and a CHECKSUM block. Example
BF2D@Hj57@r0@ia@p1@l5950@[email protected]@d12@gA500HW@s30@v@Gl5950@w0@C84@
Header block starts with the letter H.
• • • • • • • • • • •
j – Project number r – Plan number – not used, exported as 0 i – Plan index – not used, exported as “a” p – Position – index of the output file row is exported l – Total length of reinforcement n – Number of reinforcements e – Weight of one rod d – Reinforcement diameter g – Material s – Standard bending radius (see below) v – Author – not used
Geometry block starts with the letter G.
• • •
l – particular length w – bending angle r – bending radius (relates to the standard bending radius, see below)
CheckSum block starts with the letter C.
• Measuring
222
see the BVBS specification
Measuring of the length is done according to the BVBS specification. Calculation of lengths also depends on the bending angle. Lengths L1 and L2 are exported.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
Standard bending radius
The bending radius affects the export of the reinforcements. If the bending radius is the same for the entire reinforcing bar and this bending radius is set by dialog box field Standard bending radius (is also written in exported HEADER block), these bending radiuses are not exported in the GEOMETRY block. Otherwise the bending radiuses are exported for each bending. The value of the bending radius can be set in fields Standard bending radius and Radius coef in the dialog box.
Exporting Unitechnik Description
This component exports the 3D geometry of the cast units into Unitechnik format. The result is a text file in ASCII format. Supported versions of the Unitechnik format are:
• • •
6.0.0 14.6.2005 5.2b 11.9.2000 5.0c 30.10.1997
This component is able to export cast units consisting of concrete, steel and surface materials. Exporting of not-bent reinforcing bars, reinforcing bar groups and meshes with hooks is also supported. This macrocomponent also supports exporting braced girders and double walls. Example 1
Exported cast unit:
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
223
Hole Steel embed Reinforcing bars Insulation plate (green) See also
Exporting cast units to Unitechnik format (p. 224) Unitechnik export reference (p. 227) Main (p. 228) Unitechnik configuration (p. 233) TS configuration (p. 237) Reinforcement (p. 239) Data specification (p. 243)
Exporting cast units to Unitechnik format To export the geometry of the selected cast units to the Unitechnik format follow the steps below. Preconditions
224
This component reads and exports some data from the numbering series of parts. It is important to have all exported parts numbered correct. Incorrectly numbered parts are not exported.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
The parts you need to select depend on the selected option in the Create from list.
Usage
1.
Update numbering.
2.
Select one object of a cast unit.
3.
Click Ctrl + F to open the component catalog. Type in Unitechnik and click Search. Double-click the Export unitechnik (79) to open the Export unitechnik (79) dialog box.
4.
On the Main tab, set the Create from to Selected cast units.
5.
On the TS configuration tab, set the following fields: a Draw profs to Yes to see exported geometry in the model after creating the component. b
Insulation classes to 3. Green object with class 3 will be considered as
insulation plate. c 6.
On the Reinforcement tab, set the following fields: a Single rebars export to Yes to export reinforcing bars in the top concrete panel. b
Result
Embeds to Selected + steel (orange steel objects will be considered as embeds)
Mesh export to Yesto export reinforcing bars in the bottom concrete panel.
7.
Click Create.
8.
Check the exported geometry.
9.
Search the name of the exported file in the component output window.
10.
Check the created file in the current model folder.
This component creates one or several output files. Number of created output files depends on the option selected in the Create from list and the total number of selected parts, cast units or assemblies.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
225
If the scanning direction is wrong, use the Rotation and Extra rotation fields. Wrong scanning plane (from the right side to the left side):
Correct scanning plane ( from back to front side):
226
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
See also
Exporting Unitechnik (p. 223) Unitechnik export reference (p. 227) Data specification (p. 243)
Unitechnik export reference Object geometry scanning
To obtain the geometry of all parts in a cast unit this component uses scanning layers. The number of the scanning layers depends on the selected Scan position (p. 238). Each object of the cast unit is scanned in one direction, which can be set with Rotation (p. 228) and Extra rotation (p. 230) properties. Real scanned geometry can be shown in the model after you have used the component with Draw profiles (p. 237) property.
Insulation
All parts considered as insulation (see Insulation classes (p. 239)) are exported in the MOUNTPART block.
Embeds
All embeds (see Embeds (p. 239) and Embed classes) are exported in the MOUNTPART block. Other properties that affect the export of embeds are Export assemblies (p. 232) and Export assemblies outside (p. 232). If the embeds block consists of several parts, it is useful to weld all embeds into one block and then connect the created block with concrete part to a cast unit. Subassemblies are also supported.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
227
Reinforcement
This component can export single and groups of straight reinforcing bars, rectangular or polygonal meshes. The export of the bent reinforcing bars and bent meshes is ignored. The reinforcing bar group, rectangular or polygonal mesh is divided into several single reinforcing bars. All reinforcing bars are exported in the RODSTOCK block. The exported geometry can be shown with Draw profiles. This property shows the inside lines of the exported reinforcing bars. Hooks are also supported. If Export type is set to Fabrication of welded rebars, the single reinforcing bar is exported in one STEELMAT block, all reinforcing bars of one group are exported together in one STEELMAT block, all reinforcing bars of one mesh are also exported together in one STEELMAT block.
Braced girders
The class of reinforcements, steel rods or profiles representing braced girder has to be entered in the Braced girder classes (p. 240) field. For example 15 17 5 means that parts with class 15, 17, or 5 are consider as braced girders. If the Braced girder export and Braced girder classes fields are not set, the braced girders will be exported incorrectly as reinforcement or embeds.
Double walls
Set the user-defined attribute Product type (UT product type) of the first panel to Double wall (1st stage). Set the other panel to Double wall (2nd stage). Double wall panels are exported separately in UNITECHNIK.
Main This describes the fields on the Main tab of the Export unitechnik (79) component. Create from
This option defines the parts or cast-units that are exported.
•
All parts: preselected parts are not required, all cast units from the current model are exported. Each cast unit has one output file.
•
Selected cast units: exports only cast units that have one or more parts selected in the model. Each cast unit has one output file.
•
Selected parts (specially): exports only the selected concrete parts (also embeds and
insulation parts belonging to the selected part). Each part has one output file.
•
Selected parts (cast united): selected parts belonging to one cast unit are grouped and exported together in one output file.
•
Selected assemblies: all selected assemblies are exported. One assembly equals one cast
unit and has one output file. Selection of subassemblies is also allowed. Rotation
228
This option defines the scanning direction. The scanning direction depends on the plane of the cast unit main part. A floor panel is scanned from bottom to top side. Awall panel and a column are scanned from one side to the other side. The position and direction of a basic shape of the exported cast unit depends on the rotation.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
Option
Description
No
Floor: Bottom to top
Example
Wall: Front to rear side Column: Side to side
180
Floor: Top to bottom Wall: Rear to front side Column: From one side to the opposite side
+90 around X
Floor: Left to right side Wall: Top to bottom Column: Side to side
-90 around X
Floor: Right to left side Wall: Bottom to top Column: From one side to the opposite side
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
229
Option
Description
+90 around Y
Floor: Front to rear side
Example
Wall: Left to right side Column: Bottom to top
-90 around Y
Floor: Rear to front side Wall: Right to left side Column: Top to bottom
Extra rotation
This affects the rotation around the Z coordinate. The Z coordinate still has the same direction, but the X and Y direction are changed. To show the actual coordinate system, set Draw axis to Yes on the TS configuration tab.
Option
Description
No
No extra rotation.
Swap X/Y
Swap X and Y axis.
X=max(X_dim,Y_dim ) main part
X axis goes through the longer side of the main part.
X=min(X_dim,Y_dim ) main part
X axis goes through the shorter side of the main part.
X=max(X_dim,Y_dim ) cast unit
X axis goes through the longer side of the cast unit.
X=min(X_dim,Y_dim ) cast unit
X axis goes through the shorter side of the cast unit.
+90 around Z
Rotates X and Y axis around Z axis by 90 degrees.
- 90 around Z
Rotates X and Y axis around Z axis by -90 degrees.
180 around Z
Rotates X and Y axis around Z axis by 180 degrees.
The following picture shows the coordinate system with no rotation and no extra rotation settings. Panel 1 has the X axis set parallel to the shorter side. It is incorrect in Unitechnik format, so the coordinate system has to be rotated. Panel 2 shows a rotation by 90 degrees around the Z axis.
230
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
Special assemblies export / Special export assembly file name These properties influence the exported geometry of the embeds. The real geometry is replaced by the geometry defined in special text files. The default name of the text file is spec_assemblies_def.txt and is primary searched in the model folder. The file name and path can be specified by the Special export assembly file name property. Required structure of text file is:
• • •
Name(text) Number_of_lines_defined(number) S(representing single line) Start_coors(number number) End_coors(number number) S(representing single line) Start_coors(number number) End_coors(number number)
Example of the file:
The geometry of all embeds with names (from example Quicky, QuickyS, E-Doze) are replaced by geometry defined in the text file. In the following example, the part number 1 (the name is Beam) was not found in the text file so the geometry is exact. On the opposite side the part number 2 (the name is Quicky) was found, so the geometry is replaced.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
231
Export assemblies
Specifies export of embeds and steel blocks.
Option
Description Exports embeds as parts. All embed welds and assembly relations are ignored. The exported geometry is a projection of the objects into the basic shape.
Welded embeds and assembly block are exported as one part.
Exports only the main part of the embed block or embed assembly.
Exports the main part of the embed block extended in the X direction to cover all the parts of the embed block.
Export assemblies outside
232
Defines if embeds outside concrete part are exported or not.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
Option
Description Exports all embeds without modification.
Exports only embeds inside concrete parts. Embeds outside the concrete element are ignored. If embed is partly inside and partly outside concrete part, then the outside part of embed is cut off.
Unitechnik configuration This describes the fields on the Unitechnik configuration tab of the Export unitechnik (79) component. File name
Specify the name of the output file and file name extension. The options are:
• • • • • • • • •
Proj_number.Cast_unit_number Proj_number.Cast_unit_pos Proj_number.Ass_control_number Proj_name.Cast_unit_number Proj_name.Cast_unit_pos Proj_name.Ass_control_number Cast_unit_number.user_extension Cast_unit_pos.user_extension Ass_control_number.user_extension
Cast_unit_number is the assembly position number of the main part of the cast unit. Cast_unit_pos is the assembly position of the main part of the cast unit. Ass_control_number is a special user-defined attribute, a unique number that Tekla Structures generates. To generate the assembly control numbers, click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Assign control numbers…. This requires the following definition in the ..\environments\country_independent\inp\objects.inp for concrete parts: unique_attribute("ACN", "j_acn", integer, "%d", no, none, "0.0", "0.0"){ value("", 0)} user_extension is defined with the File name extension property. Ext file name
Specify the file name extension, if the File name is set to an option containing .user_extension.
File mask
Specify the format (length) of the output file name and file name extension. Numbers represent the length of the output string. If the name is longer than the selected option, it is cut. Symbol “x” represents unlimited size.
Version
Specify version of Unitechnik. Supported versions are:
• •
6.0.0
14.6.2005
5.2b
11.9.2000
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
233
• Blank symbol
5.0c
30.10.1997
Specify the blank symbol. An example with "_" symbol:
An example with " " symbol:
Layer structure
234
Define the structure of the exported file (slabdate and layer part).
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
Option
Description
Multiple layers
One SLABDATE block with N layers. Each cast unit has its own LAYER block. Embeds, reinforcement and insulations belong to one concrete part, and they are exported in the related LAYER block. HEADER__ … SLABDATE … LAYER___ … END LAYER___ LAYER___ … END LAYER___ LAYER___ … END LAYER___ END SLABDATE END HEADER__
Single layer, 1 slabdate
Each cast unit has its own SLABDATE block, no LAYER blocks. HEADER__ … SLABDATE … END SLABDATE SLABDATE … END SLABDATE SLABDATE … END SLABDATE END HEADER__
Single layer, n slabdate
Cast units with equal geometry are collected in one SLABDATE block. No LAYER and LOT blocks are defined. Embeds, reinforcement and insulations belonging to a cast unit with the same geometry are collected and exported in one SLABDATE block. HEADER__ … SLABDATE … END SLABDATE SLABDATE … END SLABDATE END HEADER__
Geometry export
Specify if the geometry of the exported part is represented as polygons or lines. Below are two examples of the output file showing the differences between the polygons and the lines exported. Polygons exported:
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
235
Lines exported:
236
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
TS configuration This describes the fields on the TS configuration tab of the Export unitechnik (79) component. Draw axis
Shows the coordinate system. The X axis is a line consisting of single points. The Y axis is a line consisting of doubled points line. The Z axis is a line consisting of three points in line.
Draw profiles
This option allows you to check, if the geometry of the exported parts is correct. It shows the lines representing the exported rectangle of the basic shape, the exported geometry of parts, cuts, embeds, and reinforcement. Embeds are projected to the plane of the basic shape. The reinforcement lines are positioned inside each reinforcing bar.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
237
Basic shape Geometry of main element. Cut geometry Embed geometry Scan position
Defines the position in which all parts are scanned. Each part is scanned separately. Scanning plane is parallel to the basic shape plane.
Option
Description
Bottom and top
Two scanning planes at the start and at the end of the bounding box of the scanning part.
Bottom only
One scaning plane at the start of the bounding box of the scanning part.
Top only
One scaning plane at the end of the bounding box of the scanning part.
Middle only
One scanning plane at the middle of bounding box of the scanning part.
To move the position of the exact scanning plane, use the Start distance in material and End distance in material properties. Start distance in material
Defines the start offset of scanning. This property moves the scanning plane.
End distance in material
Defines the end offset of scanning. This property moves the scanning plane.
Contour export
This component is able to export one scanned layer only. With two scanned layers, they have to be recomputed into one layer. Two options of recomputation are:
238
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
Option
Description
Intersection
Make polygons intersection (AND operation) of two countour geometries.
Layer scanned first Layer scanned the second. Layers Union
Makes polygons union (OR operation) of two contour geometries
Cutout export
The same as Contour export, but for holes only.
Ignored classes
List of classes. Parts with classes in this list will not be exported.
Insulation classes
List of classes. Parts with classes in this list will be exported as insulation parts.
Embeds
Defines the parts that are considered as embeds. Embedded parts are exported in the MOUNTPART block.
•
Selected + steel: all classes listed in the Embed classes list are considered as embeds. All steel parts are also considered as embeds.
• •
Selected: classes listed in the Embed classes list are only considered as embeds. No export: ignores the Embed classes list and exports all steel parts as standard parts.
Reinforcement The fields on the Reinforcement tab of the Export unitechnik (79) component are described below. Single rebars export
When set to Yes, allows exporting straight reinforcing bars. Hooks are supported.
Bended single rebars export
Not supported at the moment.
Meshes export
When set to Yes, allows exporting of polygonal or rectangular meshes. Hooks are supported.
Bended meshes export
Not supported at the moment.
Braced girder export
When set to Yes, reinforcing bars or steel rods representing braced girders are exported separately in the BRGIRDER block. When set to No and if Single rebars export is Yes, then straight reinforcing bars representing braced girders are exported normally as rebars, steel rods are exported as mounted parts.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
239
Braced girder classes
List of classes. Parts with classes in this list are exported as braced girders.
Export type
Define the structure of the exported file for reinforcements.
Option
Description
Plant with lying robot only
Exports all embeds without modifications. SLABDATE CONTOUR CUTOUT MOUNPART RODSTOCK BRGIRDER EXTIRON END SLABDATE
240
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
Option
Description
Fabrication of welded rebars
The structure of the output file (one SLABDATE is shown only): SLABDATE CONTOUR CUTOUT MOUNPART RODSTOCK BRGIRDER REFORCEM STEELMAT RODSTOCK BRGIRDER END STEELMAT STEELMAT RODSTOCK BRGIRDER END STEELMAT … EXTIRON END REFORCEM END SLABDATE
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
241
Option
Description
Form mesh automatically
The structure of the output file is the same as for Fabrication of welded rebars. This option allows you to collect mesh, single reinforcing bars and reinforcing bar groups into groups exported in one STEELMAT block. Collecting is made by Mesh defined by and Name UDA fields. Collecting of meshes which belong to different concrete cast units is supported.
1 (orange color) – the mesh belongs to the bottom panel of the cast unit, mesh name is MESH1. 2 (blue color) – two single bars, name is MESH1. 3 (green color) – one reinforcing bar group belongs to the top panel, name is MESH1. If Export Type is set to Form mesh automatically and Mesh defined by is set to Name, all three different reinforcement types are collected into one mesh, which is exported in one STEELMAT block. Mesh defined by
Parameter for automatic mesh collecting. Meshes with one bar are exported as a single reinforcing bar.
•
Class
Reinforcement with the same class number are collected into meshes. Reinforcement with one class number equals one mesh in the exported file.
•
Name
Reinforcement with the same name are collected into meshes. Reinforcement with the same name equals one mesh in the exported file.
• 242
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
UDA
Reinforcement with the same user-defined attribute (defined with Name of UDA property) are collected into meshes. Name of UDA
Specify the name of the user-defined attribute for the Mesh defined by property.
Data specification This describes the fields on the Data specification tab of the Export unitechnik (79) component. Order name (HEADER block)
Fills order fields in the HEADER block with the selected data. The options are:
• • •
Project number Project name Cast unit number
Project, line 3 content
Fills project information fields (3rd line) in the HEADER block with the selected data.
project, line 4 content
Fills project information fields (4rd line) in the HEADER block with the selected data.
Custom UDA or string
Information displayed in the project information fields of the HEADER block. The typed text depends on the selected option of the project, line 4 content. If the selected option is Project UDA, type in the name of the user-defined attribute, if it is User defined text, type in the text you like.
Braced girder type
Specify braced girder type in the BRGIRDER block in the exported file.
• •
Empty: no string exported Name: the name of the braced girder type. If the name of the top part of the braced girder is
empty, checks the remaining bar names.
• •
UDA: the value of the user-defined attribute (defined by UDA name or string) is exported. String: the text defined by UDA name or string is exported.
UDA name or string
Specify the name of the user-defined attribute or text used in Braced girder type.
Slab number (SLABDATE BLOCK)
Specify filling of slab number field in the SLABDATE blocks. Options are:
• • •
Counter Cast unit position Cast unit number
Overview of ELiPLAN import and export Description
Elematic ELiPLAN is a software for resource planning, scheduling, and management for precast concrete fabricators. Using the export and import features in Tekla Structures you can automate the data transfer between these two applications. The data transfer consists of the following actions: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Exporting ELiPLAN data file from Tekla Structures Importing ELiPLAN data file into ELiPLAN Exporting ELiPLAN status data file from Eliplan Importing ELiPLAN status data file into Tekla Structures
The ELiPLAN import (2) supports incremental approach, which means that ELiPLAN is able to create, update, and delete parts in it's database. This means that precast detailers can export the most up-to-date data files whenever the Tekla Structures model has been changed.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
243
Similar incremental support is included in the Tekla import (4). To keep the status and schedule data in Tekla Structures model up-to-date, we recommend you to update the status data regularly. See also
Exporting ELiPLAN (p. 244) Import ELiPLAN status data
Exporting ELiPLAN Exporting to ELiPLAN
To export part data to ELiPLAN, 1. 2. 3.
Press Ctrl + F to open the component catalog. Type Eliplan and click Search. Double-click Export data to EliPlan file to open the following dialog box.
4.
Set Scope of export to All and click Create to export the file. For more information on the other properties, see the table below.
Field
Description
Scope of export
Use to export all parts or only selected parts. Because of the incremental import of ELiPLAN you need to select the same parts (and some additional parts, if needed) again when exporting the next time. Otherwise ELiPLAN will think that the parts missing from the subsequent file have been deleted in the Tekla Structures model. We recommend you to always use the All option. Use the Selected option only in special cases or when you are exporting parts for the first time.
Output file name
244
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
The name of the export file created in the model folder. The default name is eliplan.eli. You can import this file into ELiPLAN.
Field
Description
Data conversion file
With this file you can convert the parametric profile names into the ELiPLAN product codes, and the material descriptions into the ELiPLAN accessory codes. The default file name is eliplan_export.dat and this file can be located in your model, XS_FIRM or XS_PROJECT folder.
List of classes to be ignored (CIP)
A list of classes to exclude from the export. Typically this contains the class numbers used for cast-in-place concrete parts.
Export plotter data
Use to include or exclude the plotter data in the exported file. If you do not need this data in ELiPLAN, select No to exclude the data from the file and to reduce the file size. Note that once you have transferred the file with the plotter data (Yes) you should never switch off (No) the export of plotter data in subsequent exports.
Export material data
Use to include or exclude the detailed material data (receipt) of parts. If you have no use for material data in ELiPLAN (you have no material handling module in ELiPLAN), select No to exclude the data from the file and to reduce the file size. Note that once you have transferred the file with the material data (Yes) you should never switch off (No) the export of material data in subsequent exports. If you do this, the receipt is also cleared in the ELiPLAN database and all modifications are lost.
Export rebar bending data
Use to include or exclude the detailed rebar bending information. If you do not need this data in ELiPLAN, select No to exclude the data from the file and to reduce the file size. Note that once you have transferred the file with the rebar bending data (Yes) you should never switch off (No) the export of rebar bending data in subsequent exports. Click this button to export the data.
Create
Before you can transfer data to EliPlan you need to define how the product codes, types, and accessory codes (material description) are moved from the Tekla Structures model to ELiPLAN. For more information, see Configuration for ELiPLAN export. See also
Overview of ELiPLAN import and export (p. 196) Import ELiPLAN status data
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
245
7.5 Exporting drawings To export Tekla Structures drawings as a DXF or DWG file: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
9.
Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing List.... Select the drawings from the list. Right-click and select Export... from the pop-up menu. The Export drawings dialog box is displayed. On the Export file tab, browse for the file you want to export by clicking the Browse... button. Select a file type: DXF or DWG. Select the Include revision mark to file name check box if you want to include a revision mark in the file name. Set the layer options as required on the Layer options tab. For more information, see Layers (p. 246). Set the other options as required on the Options tab:
•
If you want to export the drawing so that the DWG/DXF content is grouped by object, select the Export objects as groups check box. When you do this, Tekla Structures forms a new group for each object (part, mark, dimension line etc.).
• •
Set the Drawing scale and Line type scale. Select the Cut lines with text check box if you do not want to display continuous lines in exported drawings, for example, to run the line through text or drawing marks.
Click Export.
Layers Use the Layer options tab on the Export Drawings dialog box to define the layering options. If you want to specify which layers different drawing objects belong to, click Setup.... The Drawing Export Layers dialog box is displayed.
246
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
Rules define the drawing objects Available layers Click to modify layer names and color Organize the rules by right-clicking and using Move up and Move down. You cannot move the rule Other object type. This collects all the exported objects that do not match any other rules. Changing layers
To change a layer: 1. 2. 3.
Defining marks to their own layers
You can define marks to their own layers. This applies to all kinds of marks: bolt marks, part marks, connection marks, neighbour part marks, reinforcement marks and component marks. To do this: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Advanced line type and layer conversion
Right-click a layer item, and select Select layer.... The Select layer dialog box is displayed. Select the desired layer. Click OK.
Select the mark layer rule of the mark you want to define to its own layer in Layer rules. Right-click and select Add next level rule from the pop-up menu. Enter a rule name (for example, BeamMark) and select a filter (for example, beams) and click OK. Tekla Structures creates the new rule BeamMark, which you can use when exporting drawings.
You can use advanced conversion to convert the type, color and weight of lines and layers. For more information, see Advanced line type and layer conversion (p. 248).
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
247
Copying settings
To copy layer settings to another project: 1. 2. 3.
Enter a name in the uppermost field. Click Save as. Copy the file *.ldb from the current model folder to the firm or project folder. See also Folder search order (p. 73).
The font name used in Tekla Structures is used to form the name of the text style in AutoCAD. Use dxf_fonts.cnv conversion file to define which font file will be connected to the created AutoCAD style. See also Conversion files (p. 172).
Advanced line type and layer conversion You can use advanced conversion to convert the type, color and weight of lines and layers. Usage
1.
Select the Advanced line type and layer conversion check box on the Layer options tab in the Export Drawings dialog box.
2.
Define the file to be used in the conversion in Conversion file. Tekla Structures uses the file LineTypeMapping.xml in the folder ..\TeklaStructures\*version*\environments\common\inp by default for the conversion. If you need to define your own line type mappings, you can use the file LineTypeMapping.xml as a template. For more information, see Defining your own line type mappings (p. 248).
Defining your own line type mappings If you need to define your own line type mappings, you can use the file LineTypeMapping.xml in the folder ..\TeklaStructures\*version*\environments\common\inp as a template. To define your own line type mappings: 1.
Open the mapping file using a text editor.
We recommend that you use an editor that is capable to validate XML in order to maintain the structure of the document valid.
2.
Add your own definitions. Some mappings have been predefined in the mapping file. Use these mappings as a template for your own mappings. You have two options for defining the mappings:
•
Mapping according to line types only, for example all lines in all layers with line type XKITLINE01 will be exported to DASHED.
•
Mapping according to line types and layer, for example all lines on the layer BEAM with line type XKITLINE01 will be exported to DASHED. Tekla Structures first searches for this kinds of mappings by default.
This is how the file LineTypeMapping.xml is composed:
248
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
The first section consists of XML and document type definition. Do not change or remove this section. The mappings that are available are defined here. You can use these mappings as a template for your own mappings.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
249
In the following example, a new Mapping element is added to the file, where XKITLINE00 lines in the Beam layer are converted to BORDER type, color is converted to 10 and weight to 1.00 mm:
•
For the list of available line types, see the TeklaStructures.lin file, which is located in the ..\TeklaStructures\*version*\environments\common\inp folder. You can open and edit the file using any text editor. The table below describes which line type name corresponds to which line type appearance.
Line type name
Line type appearance
XKITLINE00 XKITLINE01 XKITLINE02 XKITLINE03 XKITLINE04 XKITLINE05 XKITLINE06
3. Exporting hidden lines
•
Define the color of the line in the Color attribute. Enter the color values in AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) codes (numbers from 0 to 255).
•
Define the thickness of the line in the Weight attribute. Enter the values in hundredths of millimeters.
• •
Define the layers that the mapping will apply to in the LayerName attribute. If you leave out the attribute LayerName, Tekla Structures uses the line type mapping for any layer. If you include the attribute LayerName, Tekla Structures uses the line type mapping for that layer only.
Save the mapping file to the model folder of the model whose drawing you want to export.
You can use the LineTypeMapping.xml file also for exporting hidden lines to separate layers in DWG/DXF export. Define the hidden lines to their own layers. In the following example, a Mapping element is added to the file, where XKITLINE02 lines in the Part layer are converted to HIDDEN2 type, and the layer name is converted to Part_Hidden.
250
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
For the export to succeed, make sure that the Part_Hidden layer exists on the list of available layers in the Modify Layers dialog box.
7.6 Tekla WebViewer You can publish your Tekla Structures models as web pages that can be viewed via the Internet using a web browser (e.g. Internet Explorer). Topics
Publishing a model as a web page (p. 251) Web templates (p. 254) Emailing WebViewer models (p. 254) Handling named views (p. 255) Handling clip planes (p. 255) Hiding and showing objects (p. 257) Full content rendering (p. 257)
Publishing a model as a web page To publish a Tekla Structures model as a web page: 1.
Click File > Publish as Web page.... The following dialog box appears:
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
251
2. 3.
In the File name field, enter the destination path and file name for the published model. Click Publish. If you select the Open in browser checkbox, the model opens in your web browser.
If you select Selected objects in the dialog box, use the selection switches to control whether parts or parts of assemblies/cast units are published. By default, Tekla Structures creates a PublicWeb folder with sub-folders in the current model folder, and places the published model there as an index.html file.
You can choose the location and name for the published model folder. You can also rename the published file but do not change the file name extension (*.xml).
When you open the model in a web browser, it includes several commands for examining the model. You can also right-click the model in the browser to access a pop-up menu containing these commands.
252
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
Customizing Web Viewer tooltips You can define what kind of tooltips are shown in a published Web Viewer model. Use the Template Editor to define your own tooltip templates. To see the templates in the Tooltip in Web Viewer menu in the Publish as Web Page dialog box, save the templates in the ..template\tooltips folder of the environment you are using, for example, ..\environments\default\template\tooltips. To publish a model as a web page showing customized tooltips: 1.
Click File > Publish as Web Page....
2.
In the Tooltip in Web Viewer menu, select the template you want to use. The Preview field displays the selected tooltip.
3.
Click Publish. If you select the Open in browser check box, the model opens in your web browser.
See also
Publishing a model as a web page (p. 251)
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
253
Web templates The sub-folders under ..\ TeklaStructures\*version*\nt\WebTemplates\TeklaWebViewer contain all Tekla Web Viewer specific materials, for example, a tool (*.dll) for viewing the model, and templates for HTML files. When you publish a model as a web page, Tekla Structures copies the tool and files to the folder you have specified in the File name field. You cannot modify the tool, but you can modify the HTML files to include information relevant to your firm and project. You can use project-specific template fields in the HTML files. Just insert them, surrounded by % characters, in an HTML file in the Tekla Web Viewer folder. Tekla Structures replaces them with the current information from the model you are publishing. Example
When you want the project name to show in the Web Viewer model, insert the string %NAME% in an HTML file. When you publish models as a web page, Tekla Structures takes the project name information from the Project properties dialog box.
Do not remove the string %PUBLISHED_MODEL% from the index.html file. Tekla Structures replaces it with the file name information from the dialog box.
Emailing WebViewer models To email a published model: 1. 2. See also
Zip the entire PublicWeb folder. Remember to use the folder structure. Attach the .zip file to an e-mail message and send it to the recipient. The recipient can then unzip the files and save the contents.
Receiving WebViewer models (p. 254)
Receiving WebViewer models When you receive a zipped WebViewer model, ensure you keep the folder names when you unzip it. To open the model, double-click the index.html file. See also
Sending WebViewer links (p. 254) Handling named views (p. 255) Handling clip planes (p. 255) Hiding and showing objects (p. 257) Full content rendering (p. 257) How to move and zoom? (p. 257)
Sending WebViewer links There are two ways to send links from Tekla WebViewer:
• •
254
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
Send WebViewer link Send URL link
Send WebViewer link
Use this tool to send a link to a single Tekla Structures view. To see the view name in the Named views list, the receiver copies the text string and pastes it into the WebViewer model.
To send several views, copy the text strings pointing to the views into a text file and send the text file. The receiver then copies the contents of the text file and pastes it into the WebViewer model.
See also Receiving WebViewer models (p. 254). Send URL link
Use this tool to send a URL link to the model. Recipients must have access to the folder containing your published model.
Handling named views To create named views from a published model, 1. 2. 3. 4.
Open the index.html for the published model. Zoom in on the part of the model from which you want to create the view. Right-click and select Copy location. Create a new file in any text editor (for example, Notepad) and paste the location information into it. It should look like this:
5.
The default name for the view is xyz. To change it, in your text editor, replace the text xyz with the view name that you want to use. Now you need to copy the updated location information to the published model. Select all the text in the text editor, right-click and select Copy. In WebViewer, right-click on the model and select Paste location. The view name appears on the Named views list.
6. 7.
WebViewer does not save named views with the published model. But, you can save the text file that contains the location information, then cut and paste the text to the published model in WebViewer the next time you want to use the view. To allow others to see your named views, send them using the Send WebViewer link tool. See Sending WebViewer links (p. 254).
Handling clip planes Use the keyboard shortcut P or the pop-up menu to create clip planes:
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
255
To create a clip plane, click shortcut P, and select a plane in the model: To select the clip plane, click the scissor symbol: Moving clip planes
Move the clip plane by dragging the scissor symbol. You can change the location of the symbol by holding down the Shift key and moving the symbol. Select one clip plane and press space bar to jump between clip planes.
256
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
Hiding and showing objects Use the mouse wheel to hide and show objects:
•
To hide objects, move the cursor over the objects, hold down the Ctrl key and scroll up (or press the Page Up key).
•
To unhide object, move the cursor over the hidden objects, hold down the Ctrl key and scroll down (or press the Page Down key).
•
Press the Esc key to show all objects.
Full content rendering To handle large models faster, make full content rendering unavailable:
• •
Right-click and select Disable full content rendering from the pop-up menu. To enable full content rendering, select Enable full content rendering from the pop-up menu.
How to move and zoom? Use the following commands to move and zoom in a model:
Command (Shortcut)
Action/Description
Zoom
Click Page Up or Page Down keys, or scroll mouse wheel forward to zoom in, and backward to zoom out.
Pan (P)
Click Pan and drag, or drag with the mouse middle button.
Rotate (Ctrl + R, Shift
Totate with mouse (Ctrl + R), rotate model one round (Shift + R) or rotate the model continuously (Shift + T).
? R, Shift + T) Fly (Shift+F)
Click Fly and move the mouse forward to fly forward. To change flying direction, move the mouse to the desired direction. To stop, click Esc.
Center (Ins)
Centers the model on the screen.
Home (Home)
Returns the model to the original view.
Set view point (V)
Use to relocate the center of rotation. 1. 2. 3.
Press the V key. Click to pick the new center of rotation. Hold down the Ctrl key and drag with the middle mouse button.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
257
You can also right-click the model and select the move and zoom commands from the popup menu.
258
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Import and export
8
Introduction
File extensions
This appendix contains the filename extensions of the files you save in dialog boxes using the Save as button, or the Save defaults command on the Setup menu.
Filename extension
Dialog box name
4d
Project Status Visualization
ad
Assembly drawing properties
adc
Assembly - section view properties
adcd
Assembly - dimensioning properties
adcs
Assembly - section symbol properties
add
Assembly - dimension properties
adl
Assembly - layout properties
adp
Assembly - part properties
adr
Assembly - protection properties
ads
Assembly - bolt properties
adv
Assembly - view properties
adw
Assembly - weld properties
ajm
Assembly - connection mark properties
apm
Assembly - part mark properties
asm
Assembly - bolt mark properties
cbm
Concrete beam properties
ccl
Concrete column properties
clm
Column properties
cpf
Pad footing properties
cpl
Contour plate properties
cpn
Concrete panel properties
crs
Orthogonal beam properties
csl
Concrete slab properties
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 File extensions
259
260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 File extensions
Filename extension
Dialog box name
cudc
Cast unit - section view properties
cudcd
Cast unit - dimensioning properties
cudcomp
Cast unit - component properties
cudcs
Cast unit - section symbol properties
cudd
Cast unit - dimension properties
cudgr
Cast unit - grid properties
cudl
Cast unit - layout properties
cudnp
Cast unit - neighbor part properties
cudp
Cast unit - part properties
cudr
Cast unit - reinforcement properties
cudrm
Cast unit - reinforcement mark properties
cudrp
Cast unit - protection properties
cudv
Cast unit - view properties
cunpm
Cast unit - neighbor part mark properties
cupm
Cast unit - part mark properties
dia
Twin profile properties
dim
Dimension properties
fas
Text file properties
fdg
DWG/DXF properties
fhl
Hyperlink properties
fms
Drawing frame properties
gar
Arc properties
gci
Circle properties
gd
General arrangement drawing properties
gdcom
General - component properties
gdcm
Cast unit - component mark properties
gdl
General - layout properties
gdr
General - reinforcement properties
gdrp
General - protection properties
gjm
General - connection mark properties
gpg
Polygon properties
gln
Line properties
gpl
Polyline properties
grt
Rectangle properties
ldb
Drawing export layers
ler
Layer properties
lev
Level mark properties
md
Multi-drawing properties
mvi
View properties (modeling)
ncp
Pop-mark properties
num
Numbering setup
Filename extension
Dialog box name
pm
Part mark properties
PObjGrp
Object group - representation
prf
Project properties
prt
Beam properties
rbg
Reinforcing bar group properties
rbr
Reinforcing bar properties
rbm
Reinforcement mesh properties
rep
Object representation
rev
Revision mark properties
rop
Reference object properties
sbl
Symbol properties
scr
Bolt properties
sm
Bolt mark properties
SObjGrp
Object Group - Selection Filter
stp
Preferences
txt
Text properties
vf
View filter properties
vg
View grid properties
vi
View properties (drawing)
vjm
View connection mark properties
vnp
View neighbour part properties
vp
View part properties
vpm
View part mark properties
vs
View bolt properties
vsm
View bolt mark properties
vw
View weld properties
wd
Single part drawing properties
wdcd
Single - dimensioning properties
wdr
Single - protection properties
wjm
Single - connection mark properties
wld
Weld properties
wls
Weld symbol properties
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 File extensions
261
262
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 File extensions
9
Introduction
Reserved shortcuts
This appendix lists the shortcut keys Tekla Structures installs by default. You should not assign these shortcuts to other commands. You can use upper or lower case for shortcuts containing characters (e.g. a or A). You need to use a combination of keystrokes in some shortcuts. The keystrokes are linked with the + character.
Example
To use the shortcut for Redo, Ctrl+Z, hold down the Ctrl key and press Z on the keyboard.
9.1 Common shortcuts Command
Shortcut
Help
F1
Open
Ctrl + O
Save
Ctrl + S
Delete
Del
Properties
Alt+Enter
Undo
Ctrl+Z
Redo
Ctrl+Y
Interrupt
Esc
Repeat last command
Enter
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Reserved shortcuts
263
9.2 Modeling commands
264
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Reserved shortcuts
Command
Shortcut
Pan
P
Move right
x
Move left
z
Move down
y
Move up
w
Rotate using mouse
Ctrl+R
Rotate using keyboard
Ctrl + arrow keys,Shift + arrow keys
Disable view rotation
F8
Set view rotation point
V
Auto rotate
Shift + R, Shift + T
3D/Plane
Ctrl+P
Open component catalog
Ctrl+F
Fly (in perspective views)
Shift+F
Zoom original
Home
Zoom previous
End
Zoom in
PgUp
Zoom out
PgDn
Center by cursor
Ins
Update window
Ctrl+U
Snapshots
F9, F10, F11, F12
Smart Select
S
Drag and drop
D
Middle button pan
Shift+M
Copy
Ctrl + C
Move
Ctrl + M
Ortho
O
Relative snap
R
Relative coordinate input
@, R
Absolute coordinate input
$, A
Next position
Tab
Previous position
Shift + Tab
Select filter
Ctrl + G
Add to selection
Shift
Toggle selection
Ctrl
Lock X, Y or Z coordinates
X, Y or Z
Select all select switch
F2
Command
Shortcut
Select parts select switch
F3
Select all
Ctrl + A
Select assembly
Alt + object
Snap to reference lines/ points
F4
Snap to geometry lines/ points
F5
Snap to nearest points
F6
Snap to any position
F7
Advanced options
Ctrl + E
Inquire object
Shift + I
Free measure
F
Create new model
Ctrl + N
Open the Views list
Ctrl + I
Create clip plane
Shift + X
Rollover highlight
H
Hide object
Shift + H
Undo last polygon pick
Backspace
Finish polygon input
Space bar
Create AutoConnection
Ctrl + J
Phase manager
Ctrl + H
Clash check
Shift + C
AutoDrawing
Ctrl + W
Drawing list
Ctrl + L
Clone drawing
Ctrl + D
Print drawings
Shift + P
Create report
Ctrl + B
9.3 Drawing commands Command
Shortcut
Associative symbol
Shift + A
Black and white drawing
B
Ghost outline
Shift + G
Open drawing list
Ctrl + O
Open next drawing
Ctrl + Pg Dn
Open previous drawing
Ctrl + Pg Up
Add an orthogonal dimension
G
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Reserved shortcuts
265
9.4 UCS Command
Shortcut
Set UCS origin
U
Set UCS by two points
Shift+U
Toggle orientation
Ctrl+T
Reset current
Ctrl+1
Reset all
Ctrl+0
9.5 Representation for parts Command
Shortcut
Wireframe
Ctrl+1
Shaded Wireframe
Ctrl+2
Hidden Lines
Ctrl+3
Rendered
Ctrl+4
Show Only Selected
Ctrl+5
9.6 Representation for component parts
See also
266
Command
Shortcut
Wireframe
Shift+1
Shaded Wireframe
Shift+2
Hidden Lines
Shift+3
Rendered
Shift+4
Show Only Selected
Shift+5
Defining shortcuts (p. 30)
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15 Reserved shortcuts
Index a access rights ................................................................ 52 adding properties.......................................................... 77 adding user-defined attributes...................................... 77 advanced line type and layer conversion ................... 248 defining your own line type mappings ................. 248 line type mapping ................................................ 248 ail files .......................................................................... 68 analysis models (CIS) ........................................179, 204 anti-spyware ................................................................. 21 ASCII exporting ............................................................. 214 importing .....................................................187, 191 assdb.db....................................................................... 69 AutoConnection.......................................................... 133 changing a connection ........................................ 137 restrictions........................................................... 134 rules .................................................................... 141 setup ................................................................... 134 when to use........................................................... 23 AutoDefaults............................................................... 133 rules .................................................................... 141 setup ................................................................... 138 when to use........................................................... 23 AutoDrawings wizard files creating ................................................................. 85 AutoDrawings wizard log.............................................. 93 automating detailing ..................................................... 21 Autosave ...................................................................... 25 error....................................................................... 27 file location ............................................................ 26 keeping files .......................................................... 26 setting interval ....................................................... 25 usernames ............................................................ 26
b
bak files ........................................................................74 beam length................................................................160 bin files .........................................................................69 bolt assemblies...........................................................115 bolt assembly catalog .................................................115 viewing or modifying............................................117 bolt catalog .................................................................115 exporting..............................................................121 importing..............................................................121 importing part of ..................................................124 merging ...............................................................121 modifying .............................................................115 saving ..................................................................117 upgrading to new version ....................................121 viewing ................................................................115 bolt length calculation .................................................126 bolts catalog.................................................................115 importing catalog .................................................121 importing part of catalog......................................124 length...................................................................126 upgrading catalog to new version........................121 Bus importing..............................................................186 BVBS export ...............................................................220 by_number.ail ...............................................................81
c CAD exporting models .................................................208 import file types ...................................................181 importing..............................................................180 Calma ................................................................ 181, 208 catalog export files......................................................123 editing..................................................................124
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
267
catalogs ........................................................................18 a closer look at the export file..............................123 bolt and assembly introduction ............................115 common features and processes ..........................95 difference between Update and OK ......................97 editing export files................................................124 for advanced users ..............................................123 material introduction ............................................111 overview ................................................................95 profile introduction .................................................97 reinforcing bar introduction ..................................122 rules in profile catalog............................................98 saving a modified catalog ......................................96 units used in import and export ...........................125 which catalog am I using? .....................................96 changing the NC folder ...............................................159 changing user-defined attributes ..................................78 checking multi-user databases .....................................52 CIMsteel exporting analysis models ...................................204 exporting manufacturing models .........................205 CIS exporting analysis models ...................................204 exporting manufacturing models .........................205 importing analysis models ...................................179 CNC ............................................................................149 inner corner shape...............................................155 CNC flange clearance.................................................155 cnv files................................................................ 69, 172 Combining properties..................................................144 component description files ..........................................64 Connection Browser ...................................................137 connection properties files ..........................................139 accessing.............................................................139 saving ..................................................................139 conversion files CIS examples ......................................................206 creating................................................................173 in import and export.............................................172 locating ................................................................173 samples ...............................................................173 troubleshooting ....................................................174 where to save ......................................................173 copying multi-user models ..................................................42 creating conversion files....................................................173 cross sections......................................................103 customer-specific initializarion file .........................62 NC files ................................................................159 project-specific initialization file .............................62 shortcuts ................................................................62 standard files .........................................................85 268
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
cross sections creating ................................................................103 deleting from catalog ...........................................105 modifying .............................................................105 customizing ...................................................................77 AutoDrawings wizard files......................................85 connections............................................................22 creating standard files............................................85 interface .................................................................27 message files.........................................................81 modeling tools........................................................22 other properties files ..............................................85 parametric profiles .................................................83 properties...............................................................77 Tekla Structures with Tekla Open API...................32 toolbars ..................................................................27 user-defined fields in templates .............................79 Web Viewer tooltips .............................................253
d dat files..........................................................................65 data files and modeling tools ........................................66 db1 ................................................................................74 db2 ................................................................................74 defaults.zxt......................................................... 138, 140 deleting cross sections from catalog .................................105 material grades from catalog ...............................113 unnecessary drawing files .....................................52 detailing automating .............................................................21 dg files...........................................................................74 DGN exporting 3D ........................................................201 disabling variables ........................................................60 display adaptor optimizing performance .........................................31 distance from flange within which web is not cut ........155 dproc files......................................................................71 drawing files ..................................................................50 deleting unnecessary.............................................52 drawings exporting ..............................................................246 in multi-user mode .................................................50 DSTV ..........................................................................183 converting to DXF ................................................161 exporting ..............................................................203 importing ..............................................................183 DSTV (NC)..................................................................159 DSTV connection properties .........................................68
DSTV.bat.................................................................... 161 dstv.lis .......................................................................... 68 DWG/DXF files importing ............................................................. 179 DXF exporting 3D........................................................ 199 DXF (NC).................................................................... 161
e ECP ............................................................................ 213 edge distance ............................................................... 19 editing catalog export files .............................................. 124 connection properties.......................................... 140 drawings in multi-user mode ................................. 50 EJE............................................................................. 213 ELiPLAN overview of import and export .....................196, 243 env_global_default.ini................................................... 60 environment variables see variables ......................................................... 58 error messages in multi-user mode................................................. 43 Eureka LPM importing ............................................................. 196 executable files............................................................. 70 export basics .................................................................. 167 overview .............................................................. 167 export files from catalog ........................................................ 123 Export rebar BVBS (78)......................................220, 222 Export Unitechnik (79) Data specification................................................ 243 Main .................................................................... 228 Reinforcement..................................................... 239 TS configuration .................................................. 237 Unitechnik configuration...................................... 233
exporting 3D DGN...............................................................201 3D DXF................................................................199 ASCII files............................................................214 bolt catalog ..........................................................121 BVBS...................................................................218 CAD models ........................................................208 CIMsteel analysis models....................................204 CIMsteel manufacturing models..........................205 different formats ......................................... 170, 199 drawings ..............................................................246 DSTV...................................................................203 DWG....................................................................246 DXF .....................................................................246 ELiPLAN..............................................................244 FEM models ........................................................202 IFC files ...............................................................214 materials..............................................................114 MIS ......................................................................212 model dump.........................................................217 part of profile catalog...........................................109 profile catalog ......................................................109 SDNF...................................................................210 STAAD ................................................................202 to other software..................................................199 to other sofware...................................................170 Unitechnik............................................................223 extended application.....................................................32
f FabTrol/KISS ..............................................................213 FEM exporting..............................................................202 import file types ...................................................183 importing..............................................................182 yield stress in import............................................186 file types and function...................................................64 filter in catalogs .............................................................96 firm folder............................................................... 18, 75 fittings affect NC .........................................................160 flat bars.........................................................................87 fltprops.inp ....................................................................87
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
269
folders ...........................................................................71 firm.........................................................................76 model.....................................................................74 project....................................................................76 search order ..........................................................73 structure.................................................................72 system ...................................................................75 template.................................................................76 fonts ..............................................................................70 framing conditions.......................................................134
g grade...........................................................................113
h hard stamps ................................................................165 hidden lines.................................................................248 HLI ..................................................................... 181, 208
i IFC defining the resulting IFC entity for the exported model objects ......................................................214 exporting..................................................... 214, 216 exporting a Tekla Structures model into an IFC file.. 216 Exporting user-defined and template attributes as property sets.................................................217 import basics ..................................................................167 overview ..............................................................167 import tools .................................................................175
importing ASCII .......................................................... 187, 191 bolt catalog ..........................................................121 Bus.......................................................................186 CAD models.........................................................180 changed objects...................................................178 CIS analysis models ............................................179 different formats.......................................... 168, 175 DSTV ...................................................................183 DWG/DXF files ....................................................179 ELiPLAN ..............................................................197 Eureka LPM .........................................................196 FEM models.........................................................182 from other software..................................... 168, 175 materials ..............................................................114 MicasPlus ............................................................196 model dump .........................................................186 models, overview .................................................175 part of bolt catalog ...............................................124 profile catalog ......................................................110 profiles from previous versions ............................109 re-importing models .............................................177 SDNF ...................................................................181 S-Frame...............................................................196 STAAD.................................................................184 Stan 3d ................................................................185 Steelfab................................................................195 initialization file..............................................................57 customer-specific initializarion file .........................62 including other initialization files ............................62 project-specific initialization file..............................62 structure.................................................................60 using ......................................................................58 inner corner shape ......................................................155 inp files..........................................................................64 interface customizing............................................................27 Iteration .......................................................................145
l lay files ..........................................................................71 layers in drawings...........................................................246 legend_text.fields ..........................................................79 line type mapping........................................................248 lis files ...........................................................................69 lock attribute..................................................................53
270
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
log files ......................................................................... 89 access part pop-up menu...................................... 94 AutoDrawings wizard ............................................ 93 direct access to parts from log .............................. 93 drawing history ...................................................... 92 list of...................................................................... 90 numbering history............................................91, 92 of CAD import...................................................... 181 of SDNF import ................................................... 181 viewing .................................................................. 93
m machine tool ............................................................... 149 macro ........................................................................... 20 maintenance procedures in multi-user mode................................................. 51 manufacturing............................................................. 149 manufacturing models (CIS)....................................... 205 map to Windows fonts .................................................. 70 master models.............................................................. 38 saving.................................................................... 45 matdb.bin...................................................................... 69 material catalog .......................................................... 111 viewing or modifying............................................ 111 material grades adding to material catalog ................................... 113 deleting................................................................ 113 material types adding to material catalog ................................... 113 materials adding material grades........................................ 113 adding material types .......................................... 113 adding user-defined attributes............................. 112 catalog................................................................. 111 deleting material grades...................................... 113 exporting and importing....................................... 114 of profiles............................................................... 99 user-defined symbols .......................................... 113 matexp_cis.cnv........................................................... 206 menus creating user-defined menu .................................. 29 merging bolt catalog.......................................................... 121 profile catalog...................................................... 108 messages ..................................................................... 68 MicasPlus importing ............................................................. 196 MicroSAS ................................................................... 202 Migration Wizard .......................................................... 59
MIS export file types ...................................................213 exporting..............................................................212 list file extensions ................................................214 model dump exporting..............................................................217 importing..............................................................186 modeling in multi-user mode.................................................45 modeling tools when to customize.................................................22 modifying bolt assemblies....................................................117 bolt catalog ..........................................................115 cross sections......................................................105 material catalog ...................................................111 profile catalog ............................................... 97, 102 Monorail......................................................................183 multi user ......................................................................35 multiuser .......................................................................35 multi-user mode............................................................35 active multi-users ..................................................42 autosave................................................................40 changing the server of a multi-user model ............36 checking databases...............................................52 clearing locks.........................................................43 error messages .....................................................43 locking models.......................................................38 locks for drawings..................................................51 maintenance procedures.......................................51 numbering ...................................................... 48, 50 overview ................................................................35 recommendations..................................................44 saving in ......................................................... 40, 45 saving model revision comments ..........................41 switching between single-user and multi-user modes 36 system setup .........................................................39 when to use ...........................................................36 multi-user models copying ..................................................................42 shutting down ........................................................42 multi-user system .........................................................37
n NC ..............................................................................149 DSTV...................................................................149 formats ................................................................149 NC file classifier..........................................................150
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
271
NC files .......................................................................149 creating................................................................159 nc1 files.........................................................................74 .NET..............................................................................32 numbering controlling access to numbering setup ..................55 in multi-user mode .......................................... 48, 50 numbering history .........................................................91 numbering series ..........................................................18
o objects.inp.....................................................................80 fields ......................................................................81 optimizing performance display adaptor ......................................................31 solid buffer size......................................................31 solids .....................................................................32 virtual memory .......................................................31 options ..........................................................................19 overlapping series.........................................................92
p parametric profiles ........................................................97 part properties predefining.............................................................22 PDMS .........................................................................212 performance..................................................................31 solid buffer size......................................................31 permissions...................................................................52 phases ..........................................................................18 Plantview ....................................................................181 plotdev.bin ....................................................................71 PML ............................................................................209 pop_mark_parts.inp ....................................................163 pop-mark settings .......................................................163 pop-marks...................................................................162 Pos1...4.........................................................................19 position number in SDNF import ....................................................181 preferences...................................................................19 prfexp_cis.cnv.............................................................206 printer files ....................................................................71 privileges.......................................................................52 privileges.inp.................................................................53 profdb.bin......................................................................69
272
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
profile catalog................................................................97 exporting ..............................................................109 exporting part of...................................................109 importing ..............................................................110 merging................................................................108 viewing or modifying ............................................102 profile folder files...........................................................69 profiles adding to catalog ........................................ 103, 106 adding user-defined attributes to .........................107 catalog ...................................................................97 cross section............................................... 103, 105 defining material ....................................................99 exporting catalog .................................................109 exporting part of catalog ......................................109 importing catalog .................................................110 importing from previous versions.........................109 merging catalogs .................................................108 parametric..............................................................97 standard.................................................................97 types of chamfer ..................................................105 user-defined...........................................................97 viewing or modifying ..............................................97 profitab.inp ............................................................. 69, 83 project folder .......................................................... 18, 75 project setup catalogs .................................................................18 drawing properties .................................................24 firm and project folders ..........................................18 layouts and templates............................................24 numbering series ...................................................18 options ...................................................................19 phases ...................................................................18 print devices...........................................................24 reports and symbols ..............................................24 wizards...................................................................24 properties adding ....................................................................77
r reaction forces ............................................................147 recording macros ..........................................................20 reports of import...............................................................179 revision saving model revision comments...........................41 revision control in import ...............................................................178 rpt files ..........................................................................71
rule groups ................................................................. 134 creating ............................................................... 135 rule sets...................................................................... 134 creating ............................................................... 135 editing.................................................................. 135 priority ................................................................. 140 rules............................................................................ 141 adding to catalog................................................. 101 deleting................................................................ 101 editing catalog rules ............................................ 101 working with catalogs ............................................ 98 rules.zxt ...................................................................... 137 running macros............................................................. 20
s SACS.......................................................................... 183 save defaults ................................................................ 84 saved attributes ............................................................ 74 saving bolt catalog.......................................................... 117 in multi-user mode...........................................40, 45 master models....................................................... 45 modified catalogs .................................................. 96 SCIA ...................................................................195, 208 screwdb.db ................................................................... 69 SDNF exporting ............................................................. 210 importing ............................................................. 181 log files of import ................................................. 181 position number in import.................................... 181 SDNF (PDMS)....................................................181, 210 select filter selection filter ........................................................ 24 uses....................................................................... 24 S-Frame ..................................................................... 183 importing ............................................................. 196 shear force calculation ............................................... 147 shortcuts creating ................................................................. 62 defining keys reserved ......................................................... 30 reserved .............................................................. 263 shutting down multi-user models.................................. 42 single-user vs multi-user .............................................. 36 solid buffer size optimizing performance......................................... 31 STAAD exporting ............................................................. 202 importing ............................................................. 184 Staad .......................................................................... 183
Stan 3d .......................................................................183 importing..............................................................185 standard files ................................................................84 standard profiles ...........................................................97 Steel 2000 ..................................................................213 Steelfab importing..............................................................195 studs ...........................................................................119 sym files........................................................................70 system folder ................................................................75
t Tekla Open API ............................................................32 Tekla Structures server ................................................37 TeklaStructures.ini........................................................60 toolbars creating user-defined toolbar.................................29 customizing ...........................................................27 tooltips Web Viewer .........................................................253 tpl files ..........................................................................71 tube components ........................................................158 tube NC files ...............................................................158 twin profile conversion in import ............................................172
u UDL ............................................................................147 unfold_corner_ratios.inp ...............................................86 unfolding parameters....................................................86 Unitechnik export........................................................224 Unitechnik export refenence.......................................227 units in catalog import and export ................................125 User Field 1 ..................................................................78 user.ini ................................................................... 58, 60 editing....................................................................59 user-defined attributes adding....................................................................77 adding to material grade......................................112 user-defined profiles .....................................................97 user-defined symbols for materials.........................................................113 usernames....................................................................26 using Tekla Structures effectively.................................17
v TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
273
variables disabling ................................................................60 setting ....................................................................58 viewing bolt assemblies....................................................117 bolt catalog ..........................................................115 log files ..................................................................93 material catalog ...................................................111 profile catalog ............................................... 97, 102 virtual memory optimizing performance .........................................31
w
XML.................................................................... 181, 211 xsdb.xs..........................................................................74 xslib.db1........................................................................74 xslib.db2........................................................................74 xsr files..........................................................................74
y yield stress in FEM import ......................................................186
warning messages........................................................21 wizard files ....................................................................71 interpreting.............................................................85 working models.............................................................38
274
x
TEKLA STRUCTURES 15
z zxt files ............................................................... 137, 140